Canon PowerShot G7 X Handleiding
- Categorie
- Bridge camera's
- Type
- Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
1
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
©CANON INC. 2014 CDD-E596-010
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
15) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
2
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Wrist Strap
* Do not peel off the battery pack label.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
3
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(
8
)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
7
)
(
15
) (
14
)
(
1
) (
3
)(
2
) (
4
) (
5
) (
6
)
(
13
)
(
9
)
(
16
)
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)*
2
(2) Microphone
(3) DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMI
TM
terminal
(5)
[ (Mobile Device Connection)] button
(6) Control dial
(7) [
(Ring function selector)] /
[
(Single-image erase)] button
(8) Movie button
(9) [
(Drive mode)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /
Up button
(10) FUNC./SET button
(11) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(12) [
(Display)] / Down button
(13) Indicator
(14) [
] button
(15) [
(Playback)] button
(16)
[ (Macro)] / [ (Manual focus)] /
Left button
*1 Used with NFC features (
=
128).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (
=
156).
z Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
2
)
(
8
) (
12
)(
13
)(
5
) (
11
)(
7
)(
6
) (
10
)(
9
) (
2
)
(
16
)(
17
)(
15
)(
14
)
(1) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(2) Strap mount
(3) Lamp
(4) Lens
(5) Exposure compensation dial
(6) Mode dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Power button
(9) Speaker
(10) Flash
(11) Control ring
(12) [
(Flash up)] switch
(13) Wi-Fi antenna area
(14)
(N-Mark)*
1
(15) Tripod socket
(16) Memory card/battery cover
(17) DC coupler terminal cover
5
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
[
] Control ring (11) on front
[ ] Up button (9) on back
[ ] Left button (16) on back
[ ] Right button (11) on back
[ ] Down button (12) on back
[ ] Control dial (6) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
6
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics ...........................................................26
On/Off ..................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 27
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................27
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 27
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 27
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 28
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation........................... 28
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 29
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 29
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............30
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 30
Touch-Screen Operations ..........................................................31
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 32
Clock ...................................................................................... 33
2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ................................34
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 34
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................34
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 36
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................36
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................36
Still Images ............................................................................ 37
Movies ...................................................................................37
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 38
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................39
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................39
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................40
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information ..............................................................2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide ............................ 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 13
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 15
Basic Guide
Basic Operations.............................................................18
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 22
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................24
Touch-Screen Operations ..........................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................25
7
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 52
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................52
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................53
3 Other Shooting Modes ................................................. 54
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Shot) ....................................................................... 54
Choosing Effects .......................................................................55
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 55
Using Functions for Underwater Shots ...................................... 57
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range .....................57
Correcting White Balance ......................................................57
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 58
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........58
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 59
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ....................................59
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 60
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............60
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................61
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........61
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ..................62
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................62
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................63
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 63
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 63
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection .....................................63
Using the Wink Self-Timer .....................................................64
Using the Face Self-Timer .....................................................65
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 66
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) ............66
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................67
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 40
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 40
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................41
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 41
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................42
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................42
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................42
Continuous Shooting .................................................................43
Image Display during Playback .............................................43
Using Face ID......................................................................... 44
Personal Information .................................................................44
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 44
Shooting ....................................................................................45
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................46
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................47
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 48
Image Customization Features .............................................. 48
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 48
Changing Image Resolution (Size) ............................................ 49
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images) .....................................................................49
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........49
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................50
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 50
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ......................................... 50
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................51
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................51
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 52
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..............................................52
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ...............................52
8
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 81
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................82
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................82
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................83
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................83
1-point ...................................................................................83
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point) ............................84
Face AiAF .............................................................................. 84
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................85
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................85
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 85
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................86
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 87
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus ......................................................................................... 87
Flash....................................................................................... 88
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................88
Auto .......................................................................................88
On ..........................................................................................88
Slow Synchro ........................................................................88
Off .......................................................................................... 88
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................89
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 89
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................90
Shooting RAW Images ........................................................... 90
Other Settings ........................................................................ 91
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 91
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 91
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .....................................................................92
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen Information .................92
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................68
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................69
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................70
Shooting Various Movies ........................................................ 71
Shooting Movies in Standard Mode ...........................................71
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting ......71
Shooting iFrame Movies ............................................................ 72
4 P Mode ........................................................................73
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 73
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 74
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 74
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................74
Changing the Metering Method .................................................74
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................75
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................75
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................76
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) ................ 76
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................76
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 77
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) .........................77
Shadow Correct .....................................................................78
Using the ND Filter ....................................................................78
Image Colors .......................................................................... 78
Adjusting White Balance ............................................................78
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 79
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................79
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................80
Custom Color.........................................................................80
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 81
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................81
9
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Checking People Detected in Face ID .....................................107
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................. 107
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 107
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................108
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .......................108
Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images ...................109
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................110
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .....................................110
Editing Face ID Information ...................................................111
Changing Names ..................................................................... 111
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 111
Image Viewing Options .........................................................112
Magnifying Images ..................................................................112
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................112
Viewing Slideshows .................................................................112
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe) .................. 113
Protecting Images .................................................................114
Choosing a Selection Method ..................................................114
Choosing Images Individually ..................................................114
Selecting a Range ................................................................... 115
Protecting All Images at Once ................................................. 115
Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................115
Erasing Images .....................................................................116
Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................116
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................116
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................116
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 117
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................117
Rotating Images ....................................................................117
Deactivating Auto Rotation ...................................................... 118
Tagging Images as Favorites ................................................118
5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ............................................... 93
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 93
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 94
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 94
Adjusting the Flash Output ........................................................95
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ..................................................................................... 96
Setup via Touch Operations ......................................................96
Customization for Shooting Styles ......................................... 97
Changing Control Ring Settings ................................................97
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring .............................97
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring ...............................98
Using the Control Ring for Adjustment ......................................98
Customizing Display Information ............................................... 99
Assigning Functions to Buttons .................................................99
Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout) ......... 100
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ...................................100
Rearranging Menu Items ..................................................... 101
Saving Shooting Settings ........................................................101
Settings that can be saved ..................................................101
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....102
6 Playback Mode ........................................................103
Viewing ................................................................................. 103
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................104
Switching Display Modes .........................................................105
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ....................105
Histogram ............................................................................105
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 105
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................106
Viewing by Date ...................................................................106
10
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 138
Registering Web Services .......................................................138
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................139
Registering Other Web Services .........................................140
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................141
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 142
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 143
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 144
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................144
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................144
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size) .................................... 145
Adding Comments ................................................................... 145
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 145
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 145
Preparing the Camera .........................................................145
Preparing the Computer ......................................................146
Sending Images .......................................................................146
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 147
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................147
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................148
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 149
Editing Connection Information ...............................................149
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................149
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................149
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................150
8 Setting Menu ............................................................151
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 151
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................151
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................151
Customizing Sounds ................................................................152
Convenient Control: Touch Actions .......................................119
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................119
Changing Touch Actions Functions .........................................119
Assignable Functions ..........................................................120
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 120
Resizing Images ......................................................................120
Cropping ..................................................................................121
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................122
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................ 123
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................123
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 124
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 125
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 126
7 Wi-Fi Functions........................................................127
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 127
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 128
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ...................128
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ..........................130
Using Another Access Point ....................................................132
Previous Access Points ...........................................................132
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 133
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 133
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................133
Installing the Software .........................................................133
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................134
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................135
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 135
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................135
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................137
Previous Access Points .......................................................138
11
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................152
Date and Time .........................................................................152
World Clock .............................................................................152
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 153
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................153
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................153
Screen Brightness ...................................................................153
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 154
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 154
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 154
File Numbering ........................................................................155
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 155
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................155
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 155
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 156
Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations ...................................156
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity .............................156
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................156
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................156
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 157
Display Language .................................................................... 157
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 157
Restoring Defaults ................................................................... 157
9 Accessories .............................................................158
System Map ......................................................................... 158
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 159
Power Supplies ........................................................................159
Flash Unit ................................................................................160
Other Accessories ...................................................................160
Printers ....................................................................................160
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 161
Playback on a TV ....................................................................161
Playback on a High-Denition TV ........................................ 161
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV.................................162
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 162
Using the Software ............................................................... 163
Software ..................................................................................163
Software Instruction Manual ................................................ 163
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 164
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................164
Installing the Software .........................................................164
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 164
Printing Images .................................................................... 166
Easy Print ................................................................................166
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 167
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................167
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............168
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 168
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................168
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 169
Movie Printing Options ........................................................169
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................169
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................169
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................170
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 170
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................170
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................171
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 171
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................171
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................171
Adding Images Individually ..................................................172
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................172
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................172
12
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
10
Appendix .................................................................. 173
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 173
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 177
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 179
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................179
Battery Level .......................................................................179
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................180
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................180
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 181
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................181
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................183
Shooting Tab ............................................................................186
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 192
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................192
Playback Tab ...........................................................................192
Print Tab ..................................................................................193
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 193
Specications ....................................................................... 194
Camera Specications .............................................................194
Wi-Fi ....................................................................................194
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) ....................194
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 195
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................195
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................196
Flash Range ........................................................................196
Shooting Range ...................................................................196
Continuous Shooting Speed ................................................196
Shutter Speed .....................................................................197
Aperture ...............................................................................197
Battery Pack NB-13L ........................................................... 197
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE .....................................197
Index..................................................................................... 198
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 201
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 201
Security Precautions ................................................................201
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................202
Disclaimer ............................................................................202
13
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
34,
=
36
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
54
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
55)
Against Snow
(
=
55)
Matching specic scenes
Night Scenes
(
=
55)
Under Water
(
=
55)
Fireworks
(
=
55)
Starry Skies
(
=
66)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
58)
Poster Effect
(
=
58)
“Aged” Photos
(
=
59)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
60)
Miniature Effect
(
=
60)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
61)
Background Defocus
(
=
62)
Soft Focus
(
=
62)
Monochrome
(
=
63)
● Focus on faces
-
=
34,
=
55,
=
84,
=
85
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
34
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
41,
=
65
● Use Face ID
-
=
44,
=
107
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
36
14
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
128
● Share images online
-
=
138
● Send images to a computer
-
=
145
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
103
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
112
● On a TV
-
=
161
● On a computer
-
=
164
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
107
● Erase images
-
=
116
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
34,
=
71,
=
96
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
103
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
166
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
164
15
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense articial
light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
16
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
17
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
18
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
z Thread the end of the strap through the
strap hole (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
z The strap can also be attached to the left
side of the camera.
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your wrist.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(
2
)
(
1
)
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
19
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
195).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
154).
1
Open the cover.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
z When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LH
CB-2LHE
(
2
)
(
1
)
20
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
z The memory card will pop up.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Insert the battery pack.
z Holding the battery pack with the terminals
(1) facing as shown, press the battery lock
(2) in the direction of the arrow and insert
the battery pack until the lock clicks shut.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position.
z Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
195).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
21
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
z Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ] tab.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20) to adjust the settings.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
159), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
2
Set the date and time.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [
][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [
][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
22
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
23
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish shooting.
z Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] appears on the screen,
move the [
] switch to raise the ash. It
will re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with your
nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button to access the movie
control panel, choose [ ] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
z To adjust the volume (1), press the
[
][ ] buttons.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Touch-Screen Operations
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen in step 2, and to view the
previous image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z To return to single-image display from
Scroll Display mode, touch the image in
the middle of the screen.
z Choose a movie, and touch [
] to start
playback.
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
(
1
)
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
[
] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ]
dial to browse through images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
25
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
116).
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
119).
26
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
On/Off
Shooting Mode
z Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
27).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
1
27
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to shoot.)
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
27).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
153).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
127), or when connected to a computer
(
=
164).
28
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
z Tilt the screen up to 180° upward.
z When including yourself in shots, you can
view a mirror image of yourself by rotating
the screen around toward the front of the
camera. To cancel reverse display, press
the [
] button, choose [Reverse
Disp.] on the [ ] tab, and press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
● Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
6
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
22,
=
34,
=
36).
(2) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
each shot automatically (
=
54).
(3) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (
=
55).
(4) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
(
=
73,
=
93).
(5) Movie Mode
For shooting movies
(
=
71,
=
96).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(6) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (
=
58).
29
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
183).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
z Options labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
z Options labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
157).
(
1
)
(
2
)
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (
=
179).
Display 1
Display 2
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
105).
30
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
186 –
=
192).
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
z Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
z After you have pressed the [
][ ]
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
3
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item.
z For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
z Access the FUNC. menu (1) by pressing
the [ ] button, and then either drag the
menu up or down to scroll it, or touch a
menu item to choose it.
z Touch an option (2) to choose it. Touch
the option again to conrm your choice
and return to the screen displayed before
you pressed the [
] button.
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
(
1
)
(
2
)
31
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
● To access tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired tab.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
● Touch an option to choose it. Options shown with [
][ ] icons on either
side can also be congured by touching these icons.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
● To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to
choose the option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
4
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
157).
32
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On
Connected to a computer (
=
164), or display off
(
=
27,
=
153,
=
153)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,
shooting long exposures (
=
93,
=
94), or
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
44),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
135), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
z Touch the characters to enter them.
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ] or turn the [ ] ring.
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch [ ].
z Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
z To delete the previous character, either
touch [ ] or press the [ ] button.
z Holding down the [
] button will delete
ve characters at a time.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
z Press the [ ] button.
(
1
)
33
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Clock
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [
] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
z Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
34
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen (
=
38,
=
39).
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A
zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
(2).)
(
1
)
(
2
)
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
2
35
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish shooting.
z Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
(
1
)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
z Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] appears on the screen,
move the [
] switch to raise the ash. It
will re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with your
nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
36
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
152).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
114).
- Daylight saving time (
=
20) or time zone (
=
152) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
155).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
126).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify
the date of the digest movie to play (
=
106).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
[
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
34) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
34) to compose the shot and
focus.
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
34) to shoot a still image.
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
37
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Movies
● Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while shooting
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.
(
1
)
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (
=
91).
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can
be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when
this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not
strong, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wind Filter] ►
[Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to
the subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range”
(
=
196).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
196).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
38) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
52).
38
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive mode other than [
] (
=
39,
=
43) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
49).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
44). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
20).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
73) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
39).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
–
– – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
39
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[ ] and [ ] modes.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ]
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
91). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [ ].
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the ash will
not re, and the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial).
40
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
z Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (
=
49), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
73) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on
the screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF
mode. Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue AF
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
41
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24, 28, 35, 50, 85 or 100 mm
(35mm lm equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the
angle of view of those focal lengths.
z To change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [
] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Keep turning the [ ] ring to
increase the focal length, which changes
to 35, 50, 85, and 100 mm at each click.
● Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn
the [
] ring.
● When you are using digital zoom (
=
40), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [
] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
42
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable touch-shutter function.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[On] (
=
30).
2
Shoot.
z Touch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your nger immediately.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in
step 1.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) and choose [ ].
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) to shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the [Delay]
time, either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose the number of
[Shots], and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) to shoot.
● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
43
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
116), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
110) and
ungrouped (
=
110).
● Protecting (
=
114) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (
=
107) or Smart Shufe (
=
113). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
111), magnifying (
=
112),
tagging as favorites (
=
118), editing (
=
120), printing
(
=
166), setting up individual image printing (
=
170), or
adding to a photobook (
=
171). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
110) or cancel grouping
(
=
110) rst.
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (
=
196).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the
position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
41).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
34) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr.] (
=
49) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● With Touch Shutter (
=
42), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during continuous
shooting remain constant, after they are determined for the rst shot.
44
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (
=
108).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
48).
45
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Continue registering face information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
38) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
44).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
z After [Register?] is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
32).
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
46
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the person to
check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit names or birthdays as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
44).
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button
on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
111).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
44).
● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in [Custom Display] (
=
99) on the
[
] tab so that the names are not displayed.
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [
] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
105).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
43,
=
87) will
continue to be recorded in the same position as for the rst shot,
even if subjects move.
47
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
46), and then register new face
information (
=
44) as needed.
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
● You can use the software (
=
163) to edit registered names.
Some characters entered with the software may not display on
the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as their
faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of a
person whose face info you want to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
z If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
48
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring
changes the aspect ratio (
=
97).
● Not available in [
] mode.
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of a
person to erase, and then press the [ ]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
107), overwrite their info (
=
111), or
search images for them (
=
108).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
111).
49
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
43), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can t on a memory card, see
“Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
195).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
50
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Display the electronic level.
z Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2
Straighten the camera.
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button, and on the [ ] tab, choose [Custom Display].
Add a [
] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level.
● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (
=
155).
● Not available in [
] mode.
(
1
) (
2
)
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will t on a memory card,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
196).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 60 fps
For shooting in Full HD
[
] enables movies with
smoother motion
1920 x 1080 30 fps
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in standard
denition
● Black bars (displayed on the top and bottom in [ ], [ ],
and [
] modes and on the left and right in [ ] mode)
indicate image areas not recorded.
51
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Shoot.
z [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
52).
● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
mode (
=
39).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
43,
=
87).
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Check the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
40)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
161)
● Not available in [
] mode.
52
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Time]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
30).
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
53
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
52).
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
180).
● When [Display Time] (
=
52) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images, by pressing the [
] button.
54
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each
Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
z After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
z To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
110).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
3
55
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
29).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
Still Images
Movies
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Choosing Effects
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
z After choosing [
] mode, turn the [ ]
ring to choose the effect.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
56
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (
=
75) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
91).
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
34).
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Still Images
Movies
z Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (
=
160).
z This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating lter
(
=
57).
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Still Images
Movies
z Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of reworks.
57
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focusing range, and then touching it again.
Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
White balance can be manually corrected in [ ] mode (
=
55). This
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
compensating lter.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ].
2
Choose white balance.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu.
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 2, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
custom white balance data (
=
79) before following the
preceding steps.
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
Still Images
Movies
If focusing is difcult in [ ] mode (
=
55) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Shoot.
Focusing Range Description
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for
even closer shots.
Quick
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some distance
away. Especially effective for moving subjects.
Manual
Focus
Focus on subjects manually (
=
81).
Refer to “Shooting Range” (
=
196) for details on the range of each
focus range.
● In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
● In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some resolutions (
=
49).
● In [
] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
this case, try setting the focus range to [
].
58
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
91).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
● [
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in bright conditions, which indicates that the camera will
automatically optimize image brightness.
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
29).
3
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
59
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from ve effect levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging
effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see
the effect (
=
103).
● The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Adding Artistic Effects
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
z Turn the [
] ring to choose an effect.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
60
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [
] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
61
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
48). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
62
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
z A blinking [
] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the
subject, and ensure ample distance between the subject and
background.
● There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
● To adjust the effect level, turn the [
] ring.
63
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
Still Images
Movies
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
z Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
z To pause smile detection, press the
[
] button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
58) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
64
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Face the camera and wink.
z The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
z On the screen, touch the face of the
person who will wink to choose it (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halfway.
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will wink.
65
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
z After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Using the Face Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
84). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
66
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
z The person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
z All the shots are combined to create a
single image.
● Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
● For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the ash is raised.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps
4 – 5 stays still.
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially ring
the ash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without ash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
196).
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Raise the ash.
z Move the [ ] switch.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button. The ash res
as the camera takes the rst shot.
z The second and third shots are now
taken, without ring the ash.
67
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
92) before shooting.
● To adjust subject brightness, try changing the ash exposure
compensation (
=
89).
● To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
compensation (
=
74). However, images may not look as
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
● To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility]
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
68
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
60 seconds.
● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
92) before shooting.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
81) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
92) before shooting.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
81) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
69
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Shoot.
z Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briey, and then shooting
begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 60 seconds.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
153) while shooting.
Item Options Details
Effect
Choose movie effects, such
as star trails.
Shot Interval
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval between
each shot.
Frame Rate
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Shooting Time
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min.,
Unlimited
Choose the length of the
recording session. To record
until the battery runs out,
choose [Unlimited].
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Interval between Shots Frame Rate Playback Time
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item. Choose the desired
option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Check the brightness.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
z Switch to Playback mode (
=
103) and
check image brightness.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level. Check brightness again
by taking another shot.
70
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting Colors
Still Images
Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
66), [ ] (
=
67),
[ ] (
=
68), or [ ] (
=
69).
2
Choose color adjustment.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
29).
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] ring or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [
] mode.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
79).
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by touching [
] when the
screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
79).
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
● Sound is not recorded.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night Display]
► [On] (
=
92) before shooting.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU (
=
30)
► [
] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
● To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose
MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note
that these individual images are managed as a single group, and
during playback, only the rst image is displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left
of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (
=
116), all images
in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
81) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] and use an
AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
159), shooting will stop after
about 8 hours, at most.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
55), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
71
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
z To unlock the exposure, touch [
] again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
z Touch [ ] on the screen.
z Touch [
][ ] to adjust the exposure.
3
Shoot (=
71).
● The exposure compensation dial cannot be used.
● You can also adjust the exposure by turning the [ ] ring before
recording.
Shooting Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shooting Movies in Standard Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
181).
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ ]. [ ] is
then displayed.
72
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies
using the software (
=
163).
1
Choose [ ].
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
71).
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
● The resolution is [
] (
=
50) and cannot be changed.
73
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
74 – =
92), and then shoot.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
75) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
88),
which may enable adequate exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
29) and MENU
(
=
30) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [
], make sure the function is available in that mode
(
=
181).
4
74
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
42).
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
the AF frame (
=
75).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
z The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
z [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
z To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
75
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the ISO
speed.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO
speed to suit the shooting
mode and conditions.
125, 160, 200 Low
For shooting
outdoors in fair
weather.
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
Slightly
Low
For shooting in
cloudy conditions,
or at twilight.
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,
4000, 5000, 6400
Slightly
High
For shooting night
scenes, or in dark
rooms.
8000, 10000, 12800 High
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
● You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the [
] button,
choosing [
], choosing an option (either by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [
] dial), and then pressing the [ ] button.
To specify [AUTO], press the [
] button on the setting screen.
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
74) to choose
[ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
30).
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
84).
● Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (
=
84).
76
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
● Not available with [ ] or [ ] (
=
90).
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
● You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when
choosing the ISO speed in the FUNC. menu, by pressing the
[
] button.
77
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● You can also correct existing images (
=
123).
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
] ring
adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (
=
97).
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Movies
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29
).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Options Details
Available ISO Speed
(
=
75)
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
Tone down highlights by about 200%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
[AUTO], [250] – [6400]
● ISO speed (
=
75) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supported range if you have specied a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
88).
● Continuous shooting (
=
87) is not available in this mode.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
74), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
74) is displayed.
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
42).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
51), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
● To access the setting screen in step 2, you can either touch
[
] on the screen in step 1 or touch [ ] on the exposure
compensation screen (
=
74).
● You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then
touching [
].
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
78
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Underwater
For shooting underwater (
=
55).
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
79).
Shadow Correct
Still Images
Movies
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
ND lter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS
Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the
camera (
=
91).
● ND: Neutral Density
79
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
Congure advanced settings.
z To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] ring
or [ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons.
z To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [
] button to complete
the setting.
● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps in
“Adjusting White Balance” (
=
78)), but correction levels will be
reset if you record custom white balance data.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the [
] ring
(
=
97).
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds
on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color temperature
unit representing color temperature conversion lter density)
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
] in
step 1.
● On the screen in step 2, you can touch [
] to restore the
original level and touch [
] to return to the shooting screen.
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
z Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
78) to choose [ ] or [ ].
z Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
z The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
● You can also record white balance data on the screen above by
touching [
].
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
78) to choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
80
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● White balance (
=
78) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
80) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
z For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
● You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains,
foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
and other qualities as desired (
=
80).
81
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
196).
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (1, which shows the distance and
focal position) and the magnied display
area, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
z To adjust the magnication, press the [
]
button.
z During magnied display, you can move
the focusing frame by dragging on the
screen.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
(
1
)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (
=
196).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
42).
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [
], and then touching it again.
82
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
88).
● Continuous shooting (
=
87) is not available in this mode.
● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
81).
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
42).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
51), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (
=
83) is
[1-point] and AF frame size (
=
84) is [Normal], and these
settings cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
40) or
digital tele-converter (
=
83), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
161), but the magnied display will not appear.
● You can also adjust the focus by turning the [ ] ring (
=
97).
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
● You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ ]. [ ] is
then displayed.
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
83
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
1-point
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing. You can also
move the frame by touching the screen (
=
86).
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway and [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
51) is set to [On].
● To access the screen in step 2, you can either touch [ ] on the
screen in step 1 or touch [
] on the manual focus screen
(
=
81).
● You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the bar
on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [
].
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
30).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (
=
40)
or AF-point zoom (
=
51).
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
40).
84
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● On the screen in step 2, you can also move the AF frame by
touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position
by touching [
], or exit the setting by touching [ ].
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
(
=
48) setting.
- [
] or [ ]: 31 frames
- [
] or [ ]: 25 frames
- [
]: 21 frames
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
85) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [1-point].
1
Move the AF frame.
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
z You can turn the [
] dial to move the AF
frame and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to ne-tune the position.
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
]
button.
2
Resize the AF frame.
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
40) or digital tele-converter (
=
83), and in manual
focus mode (
=
81).
● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
=
75).
● You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
85
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Prepare the camera for Face Select.
z Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(
=
84).
z Assign [
] to the [ ] button (
=
99).
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
30).
2
Focus.
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
30) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
41).
86
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1
Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(=
84).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [
].
3
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
2
Enter Face Select mode.
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
z If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
3
Choose the face to focus on.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specied AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people
detected are not displayed when you have selected another,
unregistered face to focus on. However, their names will be
recorded in the still images (
=
44).
87
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps
the Subject in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed”
(
=
196).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
z The images are managed together as a
group (
=
110).
● In [ ] mode (
=
55), manual focus mode (
=
81), or when
AF is locked (
=
87), [ ] is changed to [ ].
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
41).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● With Touch Shutter (
=
42), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen.
● If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
[
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Off] (
=
30).
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
● Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (
=
81), the camera will
revert to [
] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to focus.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (
=
44). However, a name will display if the subject
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
z To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
42).
88
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
91).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
● Adjustment is also possible by pressing the [ ] button, touching
the desired option, and then touching it again.
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
196).
1
Raise the ash.
z Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [
] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
89
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
74), you can lock the exposure for the ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
88).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
z The ash res, and when
[
] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
z To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
z After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE Lock cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
42) or Touch
AF (
=
86), because touching the screen will cancel FE Lock.
● FE: Flash Exposure
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
74), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
z Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
z The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the ash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
30) and
choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
30)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
30)
by pressing the [
] button and touching [ ].
90
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting RAW Images
Still Images
Movies
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
Digital Photo Professional (
=
163) to adjust RAW images as desired
with minimal loss of image quality.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29
).
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera
for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce le size.
However, the compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image
processing may also cause some loss of image quality.
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed)
data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the
camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst use the
software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality.
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will t on a
card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
195).
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for
each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without
using the software.
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
91
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
195).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Mode] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option (
=
30).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
39).
Shoot Only*
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
163).
● With [
] or [ ], the noise reduction level (
=
76), i-Contrast
(
=
77), and My Colors (
=
80) cannot be congured.
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
92
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed
to a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this
setting is useful in modes such as [ ] (
=
66).
z Press the [
] button, choose [Night
Display] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[On] (
=
30).
● The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce signicant camera shake.
z Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (
=
91) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (
=
30).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
93
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (
=
197).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
75)
15 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
91).
● The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
ash res.
● Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
94).
● Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
● [ ]: Time value
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
] dial
changes the shutter speed (
=
97).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
5
94
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (
=
197) and “Aperture” (
=
197).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed
(1), and turn the [ ] ring to set the
aperture value (2).
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
75)
250 – 40 [125]
30 – 1.3 [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [125] – [12800]
● After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
197).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
● To avoid exposure problems in [ ] and [ ] modes, you
can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or
aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise
be obtained. Press the [
] button and set [Safety Shift] on
the [
] tab to [On] (
=
30).
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
] dial
changes the aperture value (
=
97).
95
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
30)
and choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
● You can also set the ash level in [
] or [ ] mode by
accessing MENU (
=
30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► [Manual].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
30)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
30)
by pressing the [
] button and touching [ ].
● [ ]: Manual
● At ISO speeds other than [
], an exposure level mark (4) based
on your specied shutter speed and aperture value is shown
for comparison to the standard exposure level (3). [
] or [ ] is
displayed when the difference from standard exposure exceeds
2 stops.
● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
74).
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
] ring
adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [
] dial adjusts the
aperture value (
=
97).
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ] mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Specify the ash mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Flash Mode], press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [Manual], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Congure the setting.
z Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose the
ash level, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
96
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setup via Touch Operations
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed using
touch operations. Settings can also be adjusted during recording.
z Touch [
], [ ], or [ ] on the
screen, and then touch [ ][ ] to specify
a value.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
● Setup is not possible during recording by turning the [ ] dial or
[
] ring.
● Exposure can be locked before or during recording by touching
[
].
● Focus can be locked during recording by touching [
]. [ ] is
then displayed.
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Shutter Speed” (
=
197), “Aperture” (
=
197), and “Changing the
ISO Speed” (
=
75).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the settings.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● With [ ], the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, showing the difference from the standard
exposure level.
● With settings other than [
], an exposure level mark based on
your specied shutter speed and aperture value is shown for
comparison to the standard exposure level.
97
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode, and those assignments determine which functions you can assign
to the control dial.
Item
Shooting Mode
Av Tv ISO
– – –
ISO ISO ISO
Av Tv –
Focus manually (
=
81)
Correct white balance (
=
79)
Perform step zooming (
=
41)
Congure dynamic range (
=
77)
Enable or disable shadow correction (
=
78)
Adjust the aspect ratio (
=
48)
–
Assign functions as desired (
=
98)
● ISO: ISO speed (
=
75); MF: manual focus (
=
81); Tv: shutter
speed (
=
93); Av: aperture value (
=
94).
● When you assign [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to the [ ] ring,
the functions you can assign to the [ ] dial are the same as for [ ].
● Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
● The [
] ring can be used for step zooming in [ ], [ ], or
movie mode (
=
41).
● In [
] mode, you can assign aperture value or shutter speed
adjustment to the ring.
Customization for Shooting Styles
Changing Control Ring Settings
Still Images
Movies
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
1
Choose a function to assign to the
[ ] ring.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Choose an option, either by pressing the
[
] or [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the
[ ] ring or [ ] dial.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
2
Congure the assigned function.
z Turn the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to
congure the assigned function.
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching an option to choose it, and then touching it again.
98
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using the Control Ring for Adjustment
Still Images
Movies
You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed, shutter
speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen to switch between
these items.
z Touch the right edge (in the area outlined,
in this example) to view menu items, drag
up or down to choose an item, and turn
the [
] ring to specify a value.
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Note that the functions
assigned to the control ring (
=
97) are not displayed in [ ], [ ], and
[ ] modes.
ISO
Tv
Av
ISO
Av
ISO
Tv
ISO
● ISO: ISO speed (
=
75); Tv: shutter speed (
=
93); Av: aperture
value (
=
94).
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Still Images
Movies
Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Changing Control
Ring Settings” (
=
97), choose [ ] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode with
functions to assign.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1).
z Functions you can assign to the control
dial will be updated automatically.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
shooting screen.
● You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and
touching [
] in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings”
(
=
97).
● On the setting screen, you can also congure the functions
assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then
[
].
(
1
)
99
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● You can also choose an item to display by touching it.
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [ ] or
movie button.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Set
button] or [Set button] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Use the assigned function as needed.
z To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
Customizing Display Information
Still Images
Movies
Set the number of custom displays (
=
29) and what information is
displayed in each display when the [ ] button is pressed in shooting
screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [ ] tab, and
then press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then
press the [ ] button. Items you choose
for display are labeled with [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
Shooting Info
Displays shooting information (
=
179).
Grid Lines Displays a reference grid.
Electronic Level
Displays the electronic level (
=
50).
Histogram
Displays a histogram (
=
105) in [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
● Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
● Grayed-out items can also be specied, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
100
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Choose icons to include in the menu.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial and then press the [ ]
button to choose icons to include in the
FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked
with a [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
z Items without a [
] will be available on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set button] and
[
] in [Set button].
● Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
● With [
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the
[
] button in [1-point] AF frame mode (
=
83,
=
84).
● With [
] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
white balance data (
=
79), and the white balance setting
changes to [
] or [ ].
● With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
the focus. [
] is then displayed.
● With [
], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Open or close the screen
- Raise or lower the ash
● You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
● You can also congure settings by touching a desired option and
then touching it again or touching [
].
101
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Settings that can be saved
● Shooting mode ([ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ])
● Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] modes (
=
74 –
=
94)
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
● Manual focus positions (
=
81)
● My Menu settings (
=
102)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
● Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu
(
=
102), and then add to the FUNC. menu again will be
removed from My Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (
=
100),
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] or [ ] button to choose an
icon to move. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to choose the new
position, and then press the [ ] or [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
102
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[
] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes].
● On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
values, turn the mode dial to [
] and choose [Reset All] (
=
157).
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to ve commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ]
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose up to ve menu items to save
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
103
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display mode),
turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn
the [ ] dial to browse through images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
6
104
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z You can also choose images in Scroll
Display mode by dragging left or right.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or
down.
z To start movie playback, touch [
] in step
2 of “Viewing” (
=
103).
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
z To stop playback, touch the screen.
The screen at left is displayed, and the
camera is ready for your next operation.
z Touch [
] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
z To resume playback, touch [
].
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in step
2 of “Viewing” (
=
103).
3
Play movies.
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, choose
[ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
z After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Resume] ► [Last
shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
30) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
105
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
105).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z The graph in detailed information display
(
=
105) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
z The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (
=
99,
=
179).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
z The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
z Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
147). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (
=
180).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
106
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
105).
● You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the
screen in step 1 and touching [OK] on the screen in step 2.
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose a date (
=
30).
2
Play the movie.
z Press the [ ] button to start playback.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
36) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
z Choose a still image labeled with
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
2
Play the movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK].
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
107
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
z Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
105),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
44)
will be displayed.
z Press the [
] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [
][ ] buttons or turn
the [
] dial to choose an image.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
108
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Choose [Image Search].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Image Search] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose the rst condition for image
display or navigation.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
display lter.
z When [
] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 4.
3
Choose the second condition and
check the images found.
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
z To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 4.
z When you have selected [
] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the next
screen to choose a person.
Touch-Screen Operations
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
114) or delete (
=
116) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
118).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ ]
mode (
=
36).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
44).
109
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using the Control Ring to Jump between
Images
Still Images
Movies
Use the control ring to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites
(
=
118).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
z Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[ ] ring and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
z Turn the [ ] ring to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
4
View the ltered images.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
z To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 4.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 4) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
107), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
112), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
112). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
114) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
116), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
169), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
171).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
120 –
=
125), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
2 and 3.
● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
110
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
107) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
112). By choosing
[Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
114)
or [All Images in Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
116), or “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
169),
or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
171), all images in the
group can be manipulated at once.
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
still images, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Group
Images] ► [Off] (
=
30). However, grouped images cannot be
ungrouped during individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
54) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
● You can also view group images individually by touching [ ]
on the screen in step 1.
Touch-Screen Operations
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (
=
109)
by dragging left or right with two ngers.
● Turning the [ ] ring when browsing images in index display will
jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method
chosen in single-image display. However, if you have chosen [
]
or [
], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot continuously (
=
43,
=
87), images shot in [ ] mode
(
=
54), and individual still images saved as source data in [ ] mode
(
=
69) are grouped, and only the rst image is displayed. However, you
can also view the images individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
View images in the group
individually.
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the group.
z Pressing the [ ] button will display
[Display all images]. Press [ ] to cancel
group playback.
111
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
47) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
z Following step 3 in “Changing Names”
(
=
111), choose [Erase] and press the
[ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is
displayed.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
107),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
112
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
z Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
z To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
● You can check the focus when [
] is displayed by pressing
the [
] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check). When
multiple positions are in focus, press the [
] button repeatedly to
switch to other positions.
(
1
)
113
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
z Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
z For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
z Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
108)
- During group playback (
=
110)
● On the screen in step 2, touching an image above, below, or on
either side will show your chosen image in the center, surrounded
by the next four candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center image in step 2, touch that
image. To restore the original display, touch the screen again.
3
Start automatic playback.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Smart
Shufe] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
z Four candidate images are displayed.
114
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
114), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(
=
116).
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
30).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
154,
=
154).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
115
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4.
● You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
114), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
114), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
116
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
114) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
30).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
116), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
114), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other images.
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
114) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● Pressing the [ ] button while [ ] images are displayed will
give you the option of choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or
[Erase
] for deletion.
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
119).
117
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [Rotate].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
118).
● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
3
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
116), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
115) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
116), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
118
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
103), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
112), “Protecting
Images” (
=
114), “Erasing Images” (
=
116), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
169), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
171)
1
Choose [Favorites].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[Off] (
=
30).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
117) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
113) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
119
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
z The function assigned to [
] is now
activated.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [
], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ ]
tab (
=
30).
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( )
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)
● You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
=
119).
120
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
120 –
=
123) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
● You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1
Choose [Resize].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [Save new image?] is displayed.
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the next
shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the
previous shooting date.
Smart Shufe Start Smart Shufe playback.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(
=
127).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
121
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
z A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
z The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
z Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the [
] dial to switch to the
other frame.
z Press the [
] button.
(
1
) (
3
)(
2
)
4
Save the new image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
5
Review the new image.
z Press the [ ] button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
49).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
● You can also congure this setting by touching the size on the
screen in step 3, touching it again, and then touching [OK].
● You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 5.
122
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
80).
● You can also congure this setting by touching an option to select
it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
49) or resized to [ ] (
=
120).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
44), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
● To move the frame, drag either image on the screen in step 3.
● You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (
=
112) on the
screen in step 3.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
80).
1
Choose [My Colors].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
123
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● You can also congure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the
screen in step 3.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
112).
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
z Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
124
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end
(excluding digest movies (
=
36)).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
103), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
z To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
z If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [
],
but the original image cannot be overwritten.
● You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the
screen in step 4.
125
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
● [
] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
3
Review the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
z The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
159).
126
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
36) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
106) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
127
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can
also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
7
128
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
132).
1
Install CameraWindow.
z For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the
smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
z For other Android smartphones, nd
CameraWindow in Google Play and
download and install the app.
z For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, nd
CameraWindow in the App Store and
download and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
32). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
● Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
128)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
importing images from a smartphone (
=
128). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
130)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
CameraWindow app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● No matter how you connect the devices, you can also use the
smartphone to geotag (
=
147) camera images and shoot
remotely (
=
148).
129
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Choose a smartphone to connect to.
z Choose the smartphone (either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
7
Import images.
z Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
z Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Start CameraWindow.
z For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark
( ) will start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
z For other smartphones, start
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
z After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
130
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
132).
1
Install CameraWindow.
z Follow step 1 in “Sending to a Smartphone
Assigned to the Button” (
=
128) to install
CameraWindow on a smartphone.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z If a screen requesting the device
nickname is displayed, enter the
nickname (
=
128).
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● For better security, you can display a password on the screen
in step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
30) and choosing [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
● One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign
a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
30) ►
[
] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
131
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
149).
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
144).
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
z Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
128).
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[
] button.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
6
Send images.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
]
button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [
] button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [
] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures starting from step 1.
132
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
z Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
130) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
128) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
130).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
132).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
132) from step 4.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen.
Either follow steps 1 – 3 in “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
128) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
130).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (
=
135).
z For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
137) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
133
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
What you will need:
● Computer
● USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
1
Download the software.
z With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
z Access the site for your country or region.
z Download the software.
2
Begin the installation.
z Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
3
When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
134
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
When Connecting the Camera to the
Computer
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
z Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Without Connecting the Camera
z Select [Install without connecting the device]
and follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation process.
4
Install the les.
z Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
z Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
z After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the cable.
● Because the content and functions of software vary according to
the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use
each camera to update to its latest version of the software.
(
1
)
(
2
)
135
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
30)
► [
] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
32). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Wi-Fi” (
=
194).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
135) or not (
=
137). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
136
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
8
Choose the target device.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
z Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
137
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
z View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
135).
2
Choose an access point.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Enter the access point password.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
32).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
135).
11
Import images.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (
=
163).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
138
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
135).
● To reconnect to the access point, conrm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
135).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed after connection, and then either follow the procedure in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
135) from step 5 or the
procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (
=
137) from
step 2.
139
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Authenticate].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Authenticate], and then
press the [ ] button.
6
Establish a connection with an
access point.
z Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
135) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
137).
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
7
Enter the authentication code.
z On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
z A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera web link
settings page.
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
z Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2
Choose the type of camera.
z On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
z Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
3
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
32). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
140
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (
=
139).
1
Access the Web service settings
screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (
=
139) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
z In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
8
Check the conrmation numbers
and complete the setup process.
z Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
z [
] (
=
145) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [ ] icon changes
to [ ].
z A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
140) from step 2.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and
choose a device.
141
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or
add comments before sending (
=
144).
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
z Choose the icon of the Web service for
sharing (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send images.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed. Press the [
] button to return
to the playback screen.
142
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Choose the printer.
z Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
z For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
166).
z To cancel the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
132).
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected
Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
132).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
130).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on
the camera to establish a connection.
143
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Send images.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
144).
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
130).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
144
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Notes on Sending Images
● Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(
=
4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to ve
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
125), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
145
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
139).
z To choose a Web service as the
destination, follow the steps in
“Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
140) to update the camera settings.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ]
button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
z On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
32).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
146
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
z If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
z If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [
] as described in steps
1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
141).
z Once the connection is established,
the images are sent. When the images
have been sent successfully to the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [
] is
displayed on the screen.
2
Save the images to the computer.
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
159).
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
z Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
128).
z Press the [
] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
z Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
133).
2
Register the camera.
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
147
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
CameraWindow.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
147)
● Shoot remotely (
=
148)
● In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view
camera images (
=
128,
=
130,
=
149).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
152)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
148
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have congured in advance
may be changed automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Secure the camera.
z Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
128, =
130).
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote shooting.
z In CameraWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
z The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
z Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
z At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
4
Shoot.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
149
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname] (
=
149)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
130)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
149)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
149), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
z Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
32).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
149), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of the
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose a device to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [
] button.
4
Choose an item to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
z The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
150
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
] tab (
=
157).
151
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
30) functions on the [ ] tab can be congured. Customize
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
103) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
8
152
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
1
Specify your destination.
z Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
179).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
21) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options], and then press
the [
] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose an option.
● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
36) cannot be changed.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
29) or
MENU (
=
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
153
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
27).
z Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
z After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
153) to [On].
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
z Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in
single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting
on the [
] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold
the [
] button again for at least one second or restart the camera.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
179).
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
154
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
z On the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
154), press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
154) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
154), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows.
z Choose [Start-up Image], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
z Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
z To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
155
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
34), the
MF indicator (
=
81), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
z Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
99) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
z Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [
] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted (
=
154)) memory card.
● Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (
=
163) for information
on the card folder structure and image formats.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
z Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
156
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (
=
32).
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
● You can also use the software (
=
163) to enter, change, and delete
copyright information. Some characters entered with the software may
not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
● You can check copyright information recorded in images by using
the software, once you save the images to a computer.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
z Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images” (
=
156)
and choose [Delete Copyright Info].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [
] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations
The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch
operations.
z Choose [Touch Operation], and then
choose [Off].
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera
responds to a lighter touch.
z Choose [Touch Response], and then
choose [High].
157
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
162)
● [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
127)
● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
128)
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
z Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
44)
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
152), [Time Zone] (
=
152),
[Language
] (
=
157), and [Video System] (
=
162)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
79)
- Shooting mode chosen in [ ] (
=
55) and [ ] (
=
58)
modes
- Values set using the exposure compensation dial (
=
74)
- Movie mode (
=
71)
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
127)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
155)
- Copyright information (
=
156)
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Certication Logo Display], and
then press the [
] button.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
z Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
158
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
System Map
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC110
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*
3
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
Flash Unit
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Waterproof Case
WP-DC54
Cases
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
9
159
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
160
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DC54
z For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
z Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
z For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
z External ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
● High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [ ], or [ ]
shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
161
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to video
input.
z Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
z When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● It is not possible to connect the USB cable or an optional stereo
AV cable at the same time as an HDMI cable. Forcing the cables
into the camera at the same time may damage the camera or
cables.
● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
180).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with
a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at a resolution of
[ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high denition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
162
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while
previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow
the same steps as when using the camera screen. However,
AF-Point Zoom (
=
51), MF-Point Zoom (
=
81), MF Peaking
(
=
82) and Night Display (
=
92) are not available.
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Open the cover.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (
=
19) to
open the memory card/battery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown.
3
Insert the coupler.
z Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Memory Card” (
=
19)).
z Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the port (1).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
z Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Display images.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Denition TV” (
=
161) to display
images.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
163
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,
you can do the following things on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images and change camera settings
● ImageBrowser EX
- Manage images: view, search, and organize
- Print and edit images
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
5
Connect the power cord.
z Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
z Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
z When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the
camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
164
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded).
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z In the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Operating
System*
Windows Mac OS
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
* When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
“Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
133).
● Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(
=
133).
165
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available,
such as movie editing.
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
z Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (
=
163).
166
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
7
Print the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Printing now begins.
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
z When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
160).
● RAW images cannot be printed.
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
167
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
167) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as needed.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [
] dial.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
166)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
166) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (
=
167).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(
=
168).
168
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
168), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
167) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
167) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
z Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
169
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
171) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory
card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as
follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and congure items as desired
(
=
30).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
166) to choose a movie, and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button. This screen is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing
method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
170
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Specify the number of prints.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
z Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
170), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
115) to specify images.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
170), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
20).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z You can now specify the number of
copies.
z If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
171
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software
Instruction Manual” (
=
163) and the printer manual for further
information.
Clearing All Images from the Print List
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
170), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
print list (
=
169 –
=
170), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
172
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
171), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
171), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
171), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
173
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
19).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
19).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
19).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
161).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
10
174
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
88).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
74).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
77,
=
123).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
74,
=
74).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
34).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
74).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
74,
=
74).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
37).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
196).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
89,
=
95).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
75).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
196).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
34).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
89,
=
95).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
75).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
55).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
52). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4) will
be activated in ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
123).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
103), press the shutter button halfway (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
29).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
49).
No date stamp is added to images.
● Although date stamps cannot be added to images with this camera, images can
be printed with the date as follows.
- Use the software to print
For details, see “Software Instruction Manual” (
=
163).
- Print using printer functions
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
37).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
37).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
91).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
88).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
75).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
91).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
27).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
196).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
52).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
83,
=
87).
Shots are blurry.
● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
175
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (
=
163)
for details on folder structure and le names.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
154).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
151) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
151) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
60) or [ ] (
=
69) mode
because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
26).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
154).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
181 –
=
186).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (
=
44). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (
=
44), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (
=
152).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
154,
=
196).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
154).
- Lower the image quality (
=
50).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
196).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (
=
66).
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] mode (
=
60).
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
176
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or
[
] to reduce sending time (
=
145).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is
displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
150).
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
149).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
138).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application CameraWindow on
your smartphone (
=
128).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
133,
=
135).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
194). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent. In [
] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
145). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
177
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identication information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
111), Magnify* (
=
112), Smart Shufe* (
=
113), Rotate*
(
=
117), Favorites (
=
118), Edit* (
=
120), Print List* (
=
169), and
Photobook Set-up* (
=
171).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
115,
=
117,
=
170), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
169) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
171). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
169) or Photobook Set-up (
=
171) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
114), Erase
(
=
116), Favorites (
=
118), Print List (
=
169), or Photobook Set-up (
=
171).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
155), or format the memory card (
=
154).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (
=
19).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card error (
=
154)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
34,
=
54,
=
73,
=
93) or edit images (
=
120). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
116) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
19).
Touch AF unavailable
● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (
=
181).
Touch AF canceled
● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (
=
86).
Charge the battery (
=
19)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
114)
178
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
145) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
166) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
168). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
135).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
135).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
179
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(20) Blink detection (
=
51)
(21) AF frame (
=
83), Spot AE point
frame (
=
74)
(22) DR correction (
=
77)
(23) AE lock (
=
74), FE lock
(
=
89)
(24) Shutter speed (
=
93,
=
94)
(25) Electronic level (
=
50)
(26) Aperture value (
=
94,
=
94)
(27) Exposure compensation level
(
=
74)
(28) ISO speed (
=
75)
(29) Grid lines (
=
99)
(30) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
36)
(31) Touch Shutter (
=
42)
(32) Camera shake warning (
=
37)
(33) Zoom bar (
=
34)
(34) Time zone (
=
152)
(35) Image stabilization (
=
91)
(36) MF indicator (
=
81)
(37) Exposure level (
=
94)
(38) Exposure compensation level
(
=
74)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
8
)
(
7
)
(
9
)
(
11
)(
12
)(
13
) (
14
)(
15
)(
16
) (
17
) (
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
36
)
(
38
)(
37
)
(
23
)
(
10
)
(
30
)
(
32
)
(
24
) (
25
) (
27
)(
26
) (
28
) (
29
)
(
34
)
(
35
)
(
33
)
(
31
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
181), Scene
icon (
=
38)
(2) Flash mode (
=
88)
(3)
Flash exposure compensation / Flash
output level (
=
89,
=
95)
(4) Metering method (
=
74),
Shadow correction (
=
78)
(5) ND filter (
=
78)
(6) Drive mode (
=
87), AEB
shooting (
=
76), Focus
bracketing (
=
82)
(7) White balance (
=
78), Mercury
lamp correction (
=
49)
(8) My Colors (
=
80)
(9) Eco mode (
=
153)
(10) Self-timer (
=
41)
(11) IS mode icon (
=
39)
(12) Battery level (
=
179)
(13) Still image compression (
=
91),
Resolution (
=
49)
(14) Recordable shots (
=
195)*
(15) Movie quality (
=
50)
(16) Digital zoom magnification
(
=
40), Digital tele-converter
(
=
83)
(17) Remaining time (
=
196)
(18) Histogram (
=
105)
(19) Focusing range (
=
81,
=
81),
AF lock (
=
87)
180
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(30) Compression (image quality)
(
=
91) / Resolution (
=
49,
=
50), Digest movies
(
=
36), RAW (
=
90), MP4
(movies)
(31) Still images: Resolution (
=
195)
Movies: Playback time (
=
196)
(32) File size
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
161).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
103).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
126) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
126) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (
=
126))
Edit (
=
124)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
166).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
) (
3
)(
4
)(
5
) (
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
)
(
17
)
(
24
) (
26
) (
28
) (
30
)
(
25
) (
27
) (
29
)
(
31
) (
32
)
(
18
) (
19
) (
20
) (
21
)(
22
)(
23
)
(1) Movies (
=
34,
=
103)
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(3) Histogram (
=
105)
(4) Battery level (
=
179)
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
144)
(6) Image Sync (
=
145)
(7) Image editing (
=
120), Movie
compression (
=
125)
(8) Favorites (
=
118)
(9) Protection (
=
114)
(10) Folder number - File number
(
=
155)
(11) Shooting date/time (
=
20)
(12) Shooting mode (
=
181)
(13) Shutter speed (
=
93,
=
94)
(14) Aperture value (
=
94,
=
94)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
=
74)
(16) ISO speed (
=
75)
(17) Metering method (
=
74)
(18) Flash (
=
88), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
89)
(19) White balance (
=
78)
(20) White balance correction (
=
57
),
Mercury lamp correction (
=
49
),
Creative Shot effect (
=
55
)
(21) My Colors (
=
80,
=
122)
(22) Focusing range (
=
81,
=
81)
(23) ND filter (
=
78)
(24) Red-eye correction (
=
123)
(25) High ISO NR (
=
76)
(26) DR correction (
=
77)
(27) Shadow correction (
=
78)
(28) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
49,
=
50)
(29) Group playback (
=
110)
181
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / *
3
/ *
3
/ / / / / / /
/ / / *
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
89)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Output Level (
=
95)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Av/Tv Settings (
=
93,
=
94)
Aperture Value
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shutter Speed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black icons, such as .
Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons, such as .
Exposure Compensation (
=
74)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Drive Mode (
=
87)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
2
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash (
=
88)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
182
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF/MF Switching (during recording) (
=
71,
=
81,
=
96)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Move AF Frame (
=
84)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
*
7
/ *
7
/ *
7
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Touch AF (
=
86)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / *
7
/ *
8
/ *
8
/ /
*
9
/ *
9
/ *
9
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / *
9
/ /
Face Select (
=
85)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Change Display (
=
29)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [
] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*5 Only with ISO Auto selected.
*6 When [
] is assigned to the [ ] button or movie button (
=
99).
*7 Only when [
] is selected.
*8 Only available when faces are detected.
*9 Only in manual focus mode.
Program Shift (
=
74)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AE Lock/FE Lock (
=
71,
=
74,
=
89)*
4
*
1
/ *
5
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (
=
99)*
6
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Lock (when assigned to the [ ] or movie button) (
=
87)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Focusing Range (
=
57,
=
81,
=
81)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
183
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
125 – 12800
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
White Balance (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
White Balance Correction (
=
79)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
FUNC. Menu
DR Correction (
=
77)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shadow Correction (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
ISO Speed (
=
75)
AUTO
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
184
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Self-Timer (
=
41)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Self-Timer Settings (
=
42)
Delay*
5
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shots*
6
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Metering Method (
=
74)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Underwater White Balance Correction (
=
57)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Color Adjustment (Biaxial,
=
70)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
My Colors (
=
80)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / *
3
/ *
3
/ / / / / / / *
4
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Bracketing (
=
76,
=
82)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
185
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Resolution (
=
49)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Compression (
=
91)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Movie Quality (
=
50)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / *
7
/ / / / / / /
/ /
ND Filter (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
48)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Image Type (
=
90)
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
186
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
1.6x/2.0x
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF-Point Zoom (
=
51)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Servo AF (
=
85)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / *
4
/ / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Continuous AF (
=
85)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Advanced settings not available.
*3 White balance is not available.
*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
*5 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*6 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*7 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
61).
Shooting Tab
AF Frame (
=
83)
Face AiAF*
2
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
1-point
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Frame Size (
=
84)*
3
Normal
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Small
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Digital Zoom (
=
40)
Standard
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
187
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4x
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Safety MF (
=
81)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
MF Peaking Settings (
=
82)
Peaking
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Level
Low/High
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Touch Shutter (
=
42)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF-assist Beam (
=
52)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
MF-Point Zoom (
=
81)
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
2x
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
188
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Safety FE
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
ISO Auto Settings (
=
76)
Max ISO Speed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Rate of Change
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
High ISO NR (
=
76)
Low/Standard/High
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
49)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Settings (
=
52,
=
89,
=
90,
=
95)
Flash Mode
Auto
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Manual
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Exp. Comp
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Output
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shutter Sync.
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Red-Eye Lamp
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
189
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Hold
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Display Info
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Detailed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Blink Detection (
=
51)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Custom Display (
=
99)
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Spot AE Point (
=
74)
Center
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Point
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Safety Shift (
=
94)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Wind Filter (
=
37)
Auto/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Review image after shooting (
=
52)
Display Time
Off/Quick
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
190
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Dynamic IS
1
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
2
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Digest Type (
=
36)
Include Stills/No Stills
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Save Stills (
=
69)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Star Emphasis (
=
66,
=
67)
Sharp/Off/Soft
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Star Portrait Settings (
=
66)
Star Visibility
Standard/Prominent
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Night Display (
=
92)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
FUNC. Menu Layout (
=
100)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Reverse Disp. (
=
28)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
IS Settings (
=
91)
IS Mode
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Continuous
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shoot Only
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
191
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set button (
=
99)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Set button (
=
99)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Save Settings (
=
101)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*3 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (
=
44) may not be displayed in
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (
=
69)
Effect
/ / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shot Interval
15 sec./30 sec./1 min.
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Frame Rate
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shooting Time
60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Face ID Settings (
=
44)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Set Control Ring Func. (
=
97)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
192
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
My Menu Tab
Item Ref. Page
My Menu settings
=
102
Playback Tab
Item Ref. Page
Image Search
=
108
List/Play Digest Movies
=
106
Smart Shufe
=
113
Slideshow
=
112
Erase
=
116
Protect
=
114
Rotate
=
117
Favorites
=
118
Photobook Set-up
=
171
i-Contrast
=
123
Red-Eye Correction
=
123
Cropping
=
121
Resize
=
120
My Colors
=
122
Face ID Info
=
107
Transition Effect
=
103
Index Effect
=
107
Scroll Display
=
103
Group Images
=
110
Auto Rotate
=
118
Resume
=
103
Set Up Tab
Item Ref. Page
Mute
=
151
Volume
=
151
Sound Options
=
152
Hints & Tips
=
152
Date/Time
=
152
Time Zone
=
152
Lens Retraction
=
153
Eco Mode
=
153
Power Saving
=
27,
=
153
LCD Brightness
=
153
Start-up Image
=
154
Format
=
154
File Numbering
=
155
Create Folder
=
155
Units
=
155
Electronic Level
=
155
Video System
=
162
Touch Operation
=
156
Touch Response
=
156
Wi-Fi Settings
=
127
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
128
Copyright Info
=
156
Certication Logo Display
=
157
Language
=
157
Reset All
=
157
193
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, charge it about once a year and use up the remaining
charge before storage.
Item Ref. Page
Set Touch Actions
=
119
Print Tab
Item Ref. Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
170
Select Range
=
170
Select All Images
=
170
Clear All Selections
=
171
Print Settings
=
169
194
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Supported
Channels
1 – 11 (PC2201) or 1 – 13 (PC2155)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
24 – 403.2 mm
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 38.4 ‒ 160.0 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 48.0 ‒ 200.0 mm
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
4.2x zoom: 8.8 (W) – 36.8 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 24 (W) – 100 (T) mm)
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 1,040,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF
(version 1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon
Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-13L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
103.0 x 60.4 x 40.4 mm (4.06 x 2.38 x 1.59 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 304 g (approx. 10.72 oz.; including the
battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 279 g (approx. 9.84 oz.; camera body only)
195
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
48) of 3:2 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory
Card (Approx. shots)
8 GB 32 GB
(Large)
20M/
5472x3648
852 3441
1379 5568
(Medium 1)
12M/
4320x2880
1320 5329
2098 8472
(Medium 2)
4M/2304x1536
4234 17091
7442 30040
(Small)
0.3M/720x480
24562 99135
35089 141622
RAW Images
5472x3648
– 342 1385
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots Approx. 210
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 310
Movie Recording Time*
1
Approx. 40 minutes
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting*
2
)
Approx. 1 hour, 10 minutes
Playback Time Approx. 4 hours
*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed,
such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
196
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focusing
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(
)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – innity
*
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
*
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – innity
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
1.5 – 20 m (4.9– 66 ft.) 1.5 – 20 m (4.9 – 66 ft.)
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting Mode
Speed
Approx. 6.5 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
● Using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specied in Canon testing
standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
8 GB 32 GB
30 min. 03 sec. 2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
43 min. 29 sec.*
1
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.*
2
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec. 8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec. 21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec.
*1 26 min. 22 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
72).
*2 1 hr. 46 min. 33 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
72).
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
seconds when shooting in [
], [ ] or [ ], or approximately
1 hour when shooting in [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
40 cm – 4.0 m (1.3 – 13 ft.)
197
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set
range
1 – 1/2000 sec.
Available values in
[
], [ ], or [ ]
mode (sec.)*
1
*
2
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000
*1 In [ ] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.
*2 In [
] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
f/number f/1.8 – f/11 (W), f/2.8 – f/11 (T)
Available values in
[ ], [ ], or [ ]
mode*
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0, f/9.0, f/10, f/11
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions: 29.6 x 42.0 x 9.5 mm
(1.17 x 1.65 x 0.37 in.)
Weight: Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.)
198
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
Numbers
1-point (AF frame mode) 83
A
AC adapter kit 159, 162
Accessories 159
AEB shooting 76
AE lock 74
AF frames 83
AF lock 87
Aspect ratio 48
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 34
Av (shooting mode) 94
AV cable 162
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 62
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery charger 2, 159
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 153
Level 179
Power saving 27
Black and white images 80
Blink detection 51
C
C (shooting mode) 98
Camera
Reset all 157
Camera access point mode 132
CameraWindow (computer) 163
CameraWindow (smartphone) 128
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 138
Clock 33
Color (white balance) 78
Compression ratio (image quality) 91
Connecting via an access point 135
Continuous shooting 39, 43
Control ring 97, 98, 109
Creative lters (shooting mode) 58
Creative Shot 54
Cropping 121, 167
Custom white balance 79
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 152
DC coupler 162
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 83
Digital zoom 40
Display language 22
DPOF 169
Dynamic Range Correction 77
E
Eco mode 153
Editing
Cropping 121
i-Contrast 123
My Colors 122
Red-eye correction 123
Resizing images 120
Editing or erasing connection
information 149
Electronic level 50
Erasing 116
Erasing all 116
Error messages 177
Exposure
AE lock 74
Compensation 74
FE lock 89
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 84
Face ID 44
Face select 85
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 65
Favorites 118
FE lock 89
File numbering 155
Fireworks (shooting mode) 56
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactivating ash 88
Flash exposure compensation 89
On 88
Slow synchro 88
Focus bracketing 82
Focus check 112
Focusing
AF frames 83
AF lock 87
AF-point zoom 51
MF peaking 82
Servo AF 85
Touch AF 86
Focusing range
Macro 81
Manual focus 81
Quick 57
Underwater macro 57
Focus lock 83
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 29
Table 183
FUNC. menu layout 100
G
Geotagging images 147
GPS information display 105
Grid lines 99
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 55
HDMI cable 161
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 58
Household power 162
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 36
I
i-Contrast 77, 123
iFrame movies (movie mode) 72
Image quality
→
Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period 52
Erasing 116
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 114
Image stabilization 91
Image Sync 145
Indicator 32, 52
199
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory
cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 108
Self-timer 41
2-second self-timer 42
Customizing the self-timer 42
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) 65
Wink self-timer
(shooting mode) 64
Sending images 143
Sending images to another
camera 143
Sending images to a smartphone 128
Sending images to Web services 138
Sepia tone images 80
Servo AF 85
Shadow Correct 78
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 99, 179
Slideshow 112
Smart Shufe 113
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 63
Smile (shooting mode) 63
Snow (shooting mode) 56
Soft focus (shooting mode) 62
Software
Installation 133, 164
Saving images to
a computer 164
Sounds 151
Standard (movie mode) 71
Star (shooting mode) 66
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 67
Star portrait (shooting mode) 66
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 69
Star trails (shooting mode) 68
Stereo AV cable 160, 161, 162
Strap 2, 18
Super vivid (shooting mode) 58
T
Terminal 161, 162, 166
Touch Actions 119
Touch AF 86
Touch Shutter 42
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 61
Traveling with the camera 152
Troubleshooting 173
TV display 161
Tv (shooting mode) 93
U
Underwater macro
(focusing range) 57
Underwater (shooting mode) 56
V
Viewing 24
Image search 108
Index display 107
Jump display 109
Magnied display 112
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 112
Smart Shufe 113
TV display 161
ISO speed 75
J
Jump display 109
L
LCD monitor 28
M
M (shooting mode) 94
Macro (focusing range) 81
Magnied display 112
Manual focus (focusing range) 81
Manual (movie mode) 96
Memory cards 2
Recording time 196
Menu
Basic operations 30
Table 181
Mercury lamp correction 49
Metering method 74
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60
Mobile device connection button 128
Monochrome (shooting mode) 63
Movies
Editing 124
Image quality (resolution/frame
rate) 49, 50
Recording time 196
Multi-area White Balance 49
My Colors 80, 122
N
ND lter 78
Nostalgic (shooting mode) 59
P
P (shooting mode) 73
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 171
PictBridge 160, 166
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 55
Poster effect (shooting mode) 58
Power 159
→
AC adapter kit
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 166
Program AE 73
Protecting 114
Q
Quick (focusing range) 57
R
RAW 90
Red-eye correction 123
Remote shooting 148
Reset all 157
Resizing images 120
Resolution (image size) 49
Ring function selector button 97, 99
Rotating 117
S
Saving images to a computer 164
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 179, 180
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
200
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
W
White balance (color) 78
Wi-Fi functions 127
Wi-Fi menu 130
Wind lter 37
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 64
World clock 152
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom 22, 34, 40, 41
201
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
202
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Documenttranscriptie
Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera User Guide ● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” (= 15) section, before using the camera. ● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly. ● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future. ● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages. : Next page : Previous page : Page before you clicked a link ● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ENGLISH ©CANON INC. 2014 CDD-E596-010 1 Before Use Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer. * Do not peel off the battery pack label. ●● Printed matter is also included. The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity. Basic Guide ●● SD memory cards*1 Advanced Guide ●● SDXC memory cards*1*2 Package Contents Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE Before Use ●● SDHC memory cards*1*2 Initial Information Camera Compatible Memory Cards *1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera. *2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported. Battery Pack NB-13L* Wrist Strap 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● A memory card is not included (= 2). 2 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information Before Use ●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics ●● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes ●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images. ●● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera. ●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. This does not indicate damage. Index 3 Part Names and Conventions in This Guide (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Before Use (7) Basic Guide (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)(2) (12) (13) (1) (2) (3) (14) (15) (8) (9) (10) (11) (16)(17) Advanced Guide (12) (13) (4) (16) (15) (14) (1) Zoom lever Shooting:[ [ Playback:[ [ (9) (telephoto)] / (wide angle)] (magnify)] / (index)] Speaker (1) Screen (LCD monitor)*2 (10) FUNC./SET button (2) Microphone (11) [ (Flash)] / Right button (10) Flash (3) DIGITAL terminal (12) [ (11) Control ring (4) HDMITM terminal (13) Indicator (12) [ (Flash up)] switch (5) [ (6) Control dial (Mobile Device Connection)] button (2) Strap mount (13) Wi-Fi antenna area (3) Lamp (14) (4) Lens (15) Tripod socket (7) [ [ (5) Exposure compensation dial (16) Memory card/battery cover (8) (6) Mode dial (17) DC coupler terminal cover (7) Shutter button (Drive mode)] / [ (9) [ Up button (8) Power button (N-Mark)*1 (14) [ (15) [ (Ring function selector)] / (Single-image erase)] button (Display)] / Down button ] button (Playback)] button (16) [ (Macro)] / [ Left button (Manual focus)] / Movie button (Wi-Fi)] / *1 Used with NFC features (= 128). *2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (= 156). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzTurning the control dial is one way to choose setting items, switch images, and perform other operations. Most of these operations are also possible with the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. 4 ●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble. ●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. [ ] Control ring (11) on front [ ] Up button (9) on back [ ] Left button (16) on back [ ] Right button (11) on back [ ] Down button (12) on back [ ] Control dial (6) on back Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as the “memory card”. 6 Playback Mode ●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate how the function is used—whether for still images or movies. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets. ●● : Important information you should know ●● : Notes and tips for expert camera use ●● : Indicates touch-screen operations ●● =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a page number) ●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. Index 5 Table of Contents Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics............................................................ 26 Before Use Initial Information............................................................... 2 Package Contents..................................................................... 2 Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3 Part Names and Conventions in This Guide............................. 4 Common Camera Operations................................................. 13 Safety Precautions.................................................................. 15 Basic Guide Basic Operations............................................................. 18 Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18 Attaching the Strap.....................................................................18 Holding the Camera....................................................................18 Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................19 Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card.............................19 Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................20 Setting the Date and Time..........................................................20 Changing the Date and Time..................................................21 Display Language.......................................................................22 Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 22 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................22 Viewing.......................................................................................24 Touch-Screen Operations...........................................................24 Erasing Images......................................................................25 On/Off...................................................................................... 26 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................27 Power Saving in Shooting Mode............................................27 Power Saving in Playback Mode............................................27 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Shutter Button......................................................................... 27 Shooting Modes...................................................................... 28 Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation........................... 28 Shooting Display Options........................................................ 29 Using the FUNC. Menu........................................................... 29 Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings..............30 Using the Menu Screen........................................................... 30 Touch-Screen Operations...........................................................31 On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32 Indicator Display...................................................................... 32 Clock....................................................................................... 33 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode................................. 34 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 34 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................34 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................36 Digest Movie Playback...........................................................36 Still Images/Movies................................................................36 Still Images.............................................................................37 Movies....................................................................................37 Scene Icons................................................................................38 Continuous Shooting Scenes.................................................39 Image Stabilization Icons............................................................39 On-Screen Frames.....................................................................40 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 6 Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 40 Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................40 Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom).........................41 Using the Self-Timer...................................................................41 Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................42 Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................42 Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter).....................42 Continuous Shooting..................................................................43 Image Display during Playback..............................................43 Using Face ID......................................................................... 44 Personal Information..................................................................44 Registering Face ID Information.................................................44 Shooting.....................................................................................45 Checking and Editing Registered Information............................46 Overwriting and Adding Face Information..............................47 Erasing Registered Information..............................................48 Image Customization Features............................................... 48 Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................48 Changing Image Resolution (Size).............................................49 Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size (for 3:2 Images)......................................................................49 Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps............49 Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................50 Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 50 Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level..........................................50 Magnifying the Area in Focus.....................................................51 Checking for Closed Eyes..........................................................51 Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 52 Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam...............................................52 Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp................................52 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................52 Changing the Image Display Period after Shots....................52 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots..........................53 3 Other Shooting Modes..................................................54 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)........................................................................ 54 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choosing Effects........................................................................55 Specific Scenes....................................................................... 55 Using Functions for Underwater Shots.......................................57 Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range......................57 Correcting White Balance.......................................................57 Image Effects (Creative Filters)............................................... 58 Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range)............58 Adding Artistic Effects.............................................................59 Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic).....................................59 Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............60 Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............60 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips)............................................................61 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............61 Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)...................62 Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...............................................62 Shooting in Monochrome............................................................63 Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 63 Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)..................63 Auto Shooting after Smile Detection......................................63 Using the Wink Self-Timer......................................................64 Using the Face Self-Timer......................................................65 Shooting Starry Skies (Star).......................................................66 Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait).............66 Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)...................................................................67 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 7 Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)............................................68 Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)........................................................69 Adjusting Colors.....................................................................70 Shooting Various Movies......................................................... 71 Shooting Movies in Standard Mode............................................71 Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting.......71 Shooting iFrame Movies.............................................................72 4 P Mode......................................................................... 73 Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 73 Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 74 Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............74 Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock).......................74 Changing the Metering Method..................................................74 Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame.................75 Changing the ISO Speed............................................................75 Adjusting ISO Auto Settings...................................................76 Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR).................76 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)................................76 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................77 Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)..........................77 Shadow Correct......................................................................78 Using the ND Filter.....................................................................78 Image Colors........................................................................... 78 Adjusting White Balance.............................................................78 Custom White Balance...........................................................79 Manually Correcting White Balance.......................................79 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................80 Custom Color.........................................................................80 Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 81 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................81 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode................................................81 Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking).....................82 Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)....................................82 Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................83 Changing the AF Frame Mode...................................................83 1-point....................................................................................83 Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point).............................84 Face AiAF...............................................................................84 Shooting with Servo AF..........................................................85 Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................85 Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)..........................85 Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)...............................86 Shooting with the AF Lock..........................................................87 Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in Focus..........................................................................................87 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Flash....................................................................................... 88 Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................88 Auto........................................................................................88 On...........................................................................................88 Slow Synchro.........................................................................88 Off...........................................................................................88 Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation.............................89 Shooting with the FE Lock..........................................................89 Changing the Flash Timing.........................................................90 Shooting RAW Images............................................................ 90 Other Settings......................................................................... 91 Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality).....................91 Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................91 Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting......................................................................92 Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen Information..................92 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 8 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode................................................ 93 Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 93 Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)...................................... 94 Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)...... 94 Adjusting the Flash Output.........................................................95 Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values...................................................................................... 96 Setup via Touch Operations.......................................................96 Customization for Shooting Styles.......................................... 97 Changing Control Ring Settings.................................................97 Functions Assignable to the Control Ring..............................97 Assigning Functions to the Control Ring................................98 Using the Control Ring for Adjustment.......................................98 Customizing Display Information................................................99 Assigning Functions to Buttons..................................................99 Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout).......... 100 Choosing Items to Include in the Menu....................................100 Rearranging Menu Items......................................................101 Saving Shooting Settings.........................................................101 Settings that can be saved...................................................101 Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)......102 6 Playback Mode......................................................... 103 Viewing.................................................................................. 103 Touch-Screen Operations.....................................................104 Switching Display Modes..........................................................105 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights).....................105 Histogram.............................................................................105 RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display...........................105 Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies).........................................................................106 Viewing by Date....................................................................106 Checking People Detected in Face ID......................................107 Before Use Browsing and Filtering Images.............................................. 107 Navigating through Images in an Index....................................107 Touch-Screen Operations.....................................................108 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions........................108 Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images....................109 Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 110 Viewing Individual Images in a Group...................................... 110 Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Editing Face ID Information.................................................... 111 2 Changing Names...................................................................... 111 Erasing Names......................................................................... 111 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Image Viewing Options..........................................................112 Magnifying Images................................................................... 112 Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 112 Viewing Slideshows.................................................................. 112 Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle)................... 113 Protecting Images..................................................................114 Choosing a Selection Method................................................... 114 Choosing Images Individually................................................... 114 Selecting a Range.................................................................... 115 Protecting All Images at Once.................................................. 115 Clearing All Protection at Once............................................ 115 Erasing Images......................................................................116 Erasing Multiple Images at Once.............................................. 116 Choosing a Selection Method.............................................. 116 Choosing Images Individually............................................... 116 Selecting a Range................................................................ 117 Specifying All Images at Once.............................................. 117 Index Rotating Images.....................................................................117 Deactivating Auto Rotation....................................................... 118 Tagging Images as Favorites.................................................118 9 Convenient Control: Touch Actions........................................119 Sending Images to a Registered Web Service...................... 138 Using Touch Actions Functions................................................. 119 Changing Touch Actions Functions.......................................... 119 Assignable Functions...........................................................120 Registering Web Services........................................................138 Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...............................139 Registering Other Web Services..........................................140 Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................141 Editing Still Images................................................................ 120 Resizing Images.......................................................................120 Cropping...................................................................................121 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)...............................122 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast).................................123 Correcting Red-Eye..................................................................123 Editing Movies....................................................................... 124 Reducing File Sizes..................................................................125 Editing Digest Movies...............................................................126 7 Wi-Fi Functions........................................................ 127 Available Wi-Fi Features....................................................... 127 Sending Images to a Smartphone......................................... 128 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button....................128 Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu...........................130 Using Another Access Point.....................................................132 Previous Access Points............................................................132 Saving Images to a Computer............................................... 133 Preparing to Register a Computer............................................133 Checking Your Computer Environment................................133 Installing the Software..........................................................133 Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only)....................................................................134 Saving Images to a Connected Computer................................135 Confirming Access Point Compatibility.................................135 Using WPS-Compatible Access Points................................135 Connecting to Listed Access Points.....................................137 Previous Access Points........................................................138 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 142 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Initial Preparations....................................................................145 Preparing the Camera..........................................................145 Preparing the Computer.......................................................146 Sending Images........................................................................146 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera........................................................................... 147 7 Wi-Fi Functions Geotagging Images on the Camera.........................................147 Shooting Remotely...................................................................148 8 Setting Menu Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 149 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 143 Image Sending Options......................................................... 144 Sending Multiple Images..........................................................144 Notes on Sending Images........................................................144 Choosing the Image Resolution (Size).....................................145 Adding Comments....................................................................145 Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)........................ 145 Editing Connection Information................................................149 Changing a Device Nickname..............................................149 Erasing Connection Information...........................................149 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default....................................150 8 Setting Menu............................................................. 151 Index Adjusting Basic Camera Functions....................................... 151 Silencing Camera Operations...................................................151 Adjusting the Volume................................................................151 Customizing Sounds.................................................................152 10 Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................152 Date and Time..........................................................................152 World Clock..............................................................................152 Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................153 Using Eco Mode.......................................................................153 Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................153 Screen Brightness....................................................................153 Start-Up Screen........................................................................154 Formatting Memory Cards........................................................154 Low-Level Formatting...........................................................154 File Numbering.........................................................................155 Date-Based Image Storage......................................................155 Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................155 Electronic Level Calibration......................................................155 Resetting the Electronic Level..............................................156 Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations....................................156 Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity..............................156 Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images..................156 Deleting All Copyright Information........................................156 Checking Certification Logos....................................................157 Display Language.....................................................................157 Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................157 Restoring Defaults....................................................................157 9 Accessories.............................................................. 158 System Map.......................................................................... 158 Optional Accessories............................................................. 159 Power Supplies.........................................................................159 Flash Unit.................................................................................160 Other Accessories....................................................................160 Printers.....................................................................................160 Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 161 Playback on a High-Definition TV.........................................161 Playback on a Standard-Definition TV.................................162 Powering the Camera with Household Power..........................162 Before Use Basic Guide Using the Software................................................................ 163 Software...................................................................................163 Software Instruction Manual.................................................163 Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................164 Checking Your Computer Environment................................164 Installing the Software..........................................................164 Saving Images to a Computer..................................................164 Advanced Guide Printing Images..................................................................... 166 Easy Print.................................................................................166 Configuring Print Settings.........................................................167 Cropping Images before Printing..........................................167 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................168 Available Layout Options......................................................168 Printing ID Photos................................................................168 Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................169 Movie Printing Options.........................................................169 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................169 Configuring Print Settings.....................................................169 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................170 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................170 Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................170 Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................171 Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................171 Adding Images to a Photobook................................................171 Choosing a Selection Method..............................................171 Adding Images Individually...................................................172 Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................172 Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................172 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Playback on a TV.....................................................................161 11 10 Appendix................................................................... 173 Troubleshooting..................................................................... 173 On-Screen Messages........................................................... 177 On-Screen Information.......................................................... 179 Shooting (Information Display).................................................179 Battery Level........................................................................179 Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................................180 Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................180 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions......................................... 201 Radio Wave Interference Precautions......................................201 Security Precautions.................................................................201 Trademarks and Licensing...................................................202 Disclaimer.............................................................................202 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 181 Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................181 FUNC. Menu.............................................................................183 Shooting Tab.............................................................................186 Set Up Tab................................................................................192 My Menu Tab............................................................................192 Playback Tab............................................................................192 Print Tab...................................................................................193 Handling Precautions............................................................ 193 Specifications........................................................................ 194 Camera Specifications..............................................................194 Wi-Fi.....................................................................................194 Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent).....................194 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time...............195 Number of Shots per Memory Card.....................................195 Recording Time per Memory Card.......................................196 Flash Range.........................................................................196 Shooting Range....................................................................196 Continuous Shooting Speed.................................................196 Shutter Speed......................................................................197 Aperture................................................................................197 Battery Pack NB-13L............................................................197 Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE......................................197 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Index..................................................................................... 198 12 Applying special effects Common Camera Operations Before Use Basic Guide Shoot Vivid Colors (= 58) Poster Effect (= 58) “Aged” Photos (= 59) Fish-Eye Effect (= 60) Miniature Effect (= 60) Toy Camera Effect (= 61) Background Defocus (= 62) Soft Focus (= 62) Monochrome (= 63) ●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode) -- = 34, = 36 ●● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined settings (Creative Shot Mode) -- = 54 Shooting people well Portraits (= 55) Against Snow (= 55) Matching specific scenes Night Scenes (= 55) Under Water (= 55) Fireworks (= 55) Starry Skies (= 66) Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode ●● Focus on faces -- = 34, = 55, = 84, = 85 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ●● Without using the flash (Flash Off) -- = 34 6 Playback Mode ●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) -- = 41, = 65 7 Wi-Fi Functions ●● Use Face ID -- = 44, = 107 8 Setting Menu ●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest) -- = 36 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 13 View Use Wi-Fi Functions Before Use ●● View images (Playback Mode) -- = 103 ●● Send images to a smartphone -- = 128 Basic Guide ●● Automatic playback (Slideshow) -- = 112 ●● Share images online -- = 138 Advanced Guide ●● On a TV -- = 161 ●● Send images to a computer -- = 145 1 Camera Basics ●● On a computer -- = 164 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Browse through images quickly -- = 107 3 Other Shooting Modes ●● Erase images -- = 116 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Shoot/View Movies ●● Shoot movies -- = 34, = 71, = 96 ●● View movies (Playback Mode) -- = 103 Print ●● Print pictures -- = 166 Save Index ●● Save images to a computer via a cable -- = 164 14 Safety Precautions ●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly. ●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other persons from being injured or incurring property damage. ●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use. Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. ●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants when using the flash. ●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. ●● Use only recommended power sources. ●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product. ●● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one. ●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. ●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when dropped. ●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. ●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. ●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside. This could result in electrical shock or fire. If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately. ●● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. This could damage your eyesight. ●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the product and distance yourself from it. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries. ●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame. This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water. ●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions. -- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. -- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands. -- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet. -- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug. -- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if your product uses one. This could result in electrical shock or fire. ●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods. Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin. 15 Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. ●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects. ●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. ●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts. If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments. ●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing. This could result in burns or damage to the flash. ●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places: -- Places subject to direct sunlight -- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) -- Humid or dusty places These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. ●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods. ●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly. If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass may lead to cuts. ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash. This could result in injury. Caution Denotes the possibility of property damage. ●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. 1 Camera Basics ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open. This may cause the product to malfunction. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a cotton swab or cloth. The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the product to malfunction. ●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using the product. Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage. ●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators. Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. ●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. ●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets. Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire. Index 16 ●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed. This may cause the product to malfunction. ●● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it faces the body), if your product’s screen closes. ●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 17 Initial Preparations Before Use Prepare for shooting as follows. Basic Guide Attaching the Strap Basic Guide Basic Operations Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback Advanced Guide Attach the strap. zzThread the end of the strap through the strap hole (1), and then pull the other end of the strap through the loop on the threaded end (2). (1) (2) zzThe strap can also be attached to the left side of the camera. Holding the Camera zzPlace the strap around your wrist. zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 18 Charging the Battery Pack Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged. 1 Insert the battery pack. (1) (2) zzAfter aligning the marks on the battery pack and charger, insert the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and down (2). 2 Charge the battery pack. (2) (1) CB-2LH zzCB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the charger into a power outlet (2). zzCB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet. zzThe charging lamp turns orange, and charging begins. CB-2LHE zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns green. ●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 195). ●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. ●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately). Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera (= 154). 1 Open the cover. zzSlide the switch (1) and open the cover (2). (1) 3 Remove the battery pack. (1) (2) zzAfter unplugging the battery charger, remove the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and up (2). (2) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. ●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 19 (1) (2) 2 Insert the battery pack. zzHolding the battery pack with the terminals (1) facing as shown, press the battery lock (2) in the direction of the arrow and insert the battery pack until the lock clicks shut. zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted. 3 Check the card’s write-protect tab and insert the memory card. (1) zzRecording is not possible on memory cards with a write-protect tab when the tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab to the unlocked position. zzInsert the memory card with the label (1) facing as shown until it clicks into place. zzMake sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera. 4 Close the cover. (2) zzLower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide the switch, until it clicks into the closed position (2). Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card Remove the battery pack. zzOpen the cover and press the battery lock in the direction of the arrow. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzThe battery pack will pop up. Remove the memory card. zzPush the memory card in until it clicks, and then slowly release it. zzThe memory card will pop up. Setting the Date and Time Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date. 1 Turn the camera on. zzPress the power button. zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index (1) ●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 195). 20 2 Set the date and time. Changing the Date and Time zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to specify the date and time. zzWhen finished, press the [ Before Use Adjust the date and time as follows. ] ] button. Basic Guide 1 Access the menu screen. zzPress the [ Advanced Guide ] button. 2 Choose [Date/Time]. 3 Specify your home time zone. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your home time zone. 4 Finish the setup process. zzPress the [ ] button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed. zzTo turn off the camera, press the power button. ●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/ Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. zzMove the zoom lever to choose the [ ] tab. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Change the date and time. zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20) to adjust the settings. zzPress the [ menu screen. ] button to close the ●● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed. ●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 159), even if the camera is left off. ●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed ]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by by [ ]. touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ 21 Display Language Trying the Camera Out Change the display language as needed. 1 Enter Playback mode. zzPress the [ ] button. Before Use Still Images Movies Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Shooting (Smart Auto) 2 Access the setting screen. zzPress and hold the [ ] button, and then immediately press the [ ] button. For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. 1 Turn the camera on. zzPress the power button. 3 Set the display language. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the display language has been set, the setting screen is no longer displayed. zzThe startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. zzAim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. zzIcons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen. ●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after ] button. pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2. ●● You can also change the display language by pressing the ] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab. [ ●● You can also set the display language by touching a language on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again. zzFrames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 3 Compose the shot. zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 22 4 Shoot. Shooting Still Images Shooting Movies 1) Focus. zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Before Use 1) Start shooting. (1) zzPress the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. zzFrames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. zzOnce recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. 2) Finish shooting. zzPress the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. 2) Shoot. zzPress the shutter button all the way down. zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. zzKeep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 23 3 Play movies. Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. 1 Enter Playback mode. zzPress the [ ] button. (1) zzYour last shot is displayed. 2 Browse through your images. zzTo view the previous image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial clockwise. zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images quickly. Before Use zzPress the [ ] button to access the movie control panel, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. zz Playback now begins, and after the movie ] is displayed. is finished, [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzTo adjust the volume (1), press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. Touch-Screen Operations zzTo view the next image, drag left across the screen in step 2, and to view the previous image, drag right. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode zzTo access Scroll Display mode, quickly drag left or right repeatedly. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through images. zzTo return to single-image display from Scroll Display mode, touch the image in the middle of the screen. 8 Setting Menu zzTo return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. zzChoose a movie, and touch [ playback. 9 Accessories zzTo adjust the volume during movie playback, quickly drag up or down across the screen. 10 Appendix zzMovies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. ] icon. ] to start Index 24 Erasing Images Before Use You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. Basic Guide 1 Choose an image to erase. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Advanced Guide ] 2 Erase the image. zzPress the [ ] button. zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe current image is now erased. zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 116). ●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in step 2. ●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 119). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 25 Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including shooting and playback options On/Off Before Use Basic Guide Shooting Mode zzPress the power button to turn the camera on and prepare for shooting. Advanced Guide zzTo turn the camera off, press the power button again. Playback Mode zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera on and view your shots. zzTo turn the camera off, press the [ button again. ] ●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ] button. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway (= 27). ●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is ] button. retracted by pressing the [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 26 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity. Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 27). Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. ●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if you prefer (= 153). ●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via Wi-Fi (= 127), or when connected to a computer (= 164). Shutter Button Before Use To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot. In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.) zzPress the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice, and AF frames are displayed around image areas in focus. 2 Press all the way down. (From the halfway position, press fully to shoot.) zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. zzKeep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway. ●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 27 Shooting Modes Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation Before Use Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how you are shooting. Basic Guide (4) (1) (2) (5) (6) (3 ) (1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Fully automatic shooting, with camera-determined settings (= 22, = 34, = 36). (2) Creative Shot Mode See several effects applied to each shot automatically (= 54). (3) Special Scene Mode Shoot with optimal settings for specific scenes (= 55). (4) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes Take a variety of shots using your preferred settings (= 73, = 93). (5) (6) Movie Mode For shooting movies (= 71, = 96). You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not set to Movie mode, simply by pressing the movie button. zzTilt the screen up to 180° upward. Advanced Guide zzWhen including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [ ] button, choose [Reverse Disp.] on the [ ] tab, and press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. ●● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed. ●● Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will damage the camera. Creative Filters Mode Add a variety of effects to images when shooting (= 58). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 28 Shooting Display Options Using the FUNC. Menu Before Use Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen Information” (= 179). Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as follows. Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (= 183). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the FUNC. menu. zzPress the [ Display 1 ] button. 2 Choose a menu item. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a menu item (1). zzAvailable options (2) are shown at the bottom of the screen. Display 2 (1) (2) 3 Choose an option. ●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images. ●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 105). zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option. zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be configured by pressing the [ ] button. zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be configured by pressing the [ ] button. 4 Finish the setup process. zzPress the [ ] button. zzThe screen before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 157). 29 Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings zzAccess the FUNC. menu (1) by pressing the [ ] button, and then either drag the menu up or down to scroll it, or touch a menu item to choose it. (1) (2) zzTouch an option (2) to choose it. Touch the option again to confirm your choice and return to the screen displayed before you pressed the [ ] button. zzYou can access the screen for options ] icon by touching labeled with a [ ]. [ zzYou can access the screen for options ] icon by touching labeled with a [ [ ]. Using the Menu Screen Before Use Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 186 – = 192). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the menu screen. zzPress the [ ] button. 2 Choose a tab. zzMove the zoom lever to choose a tab. zzAfter you have pressed the [ ][ ] buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a tab initially, you can switch between tabs by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 3 Choose a menu item. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose a menu item. ] zzFor menu items with options not shown, first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch screens, and then either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the menu item. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzTo return to the previous screen, press ] button. the [ 30 4 Choose an option. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. 5 Finish the setup process. zzPress the [ ] button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1. ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 157). Touch-Screen Operations ●● To access tabs, press the [ and then touch the desired tab. Before Use ] button to access the menu screen, ●● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item to choose it. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Touch an option to choose it. Options shown with [ ][ ] icons on either side can also be configured by touching these icons. 1 Camera Basics ●● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the desired position on the bar. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen, either drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to ]. choose the option. To return to the previous screen, touch [ 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ●● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields) to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen keyboard. ] is shown, you can touch [ ●● When [ [ ] button, if you prefer. ] instead of pressing the 6 Playback Mode ] is shown, you can touch [ ●● When [ [ ] button, if you prefer. ] instead of pressing the 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● To dismiss the menu, press the [ ] button again. Index 31 On-Screen Keyboard Indicator Display Before Use Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 44), Wi-Fi connections (= 135), and so on. Note that the length and type of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using. The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks depending on the camera status. Basic Guide (1) Entering Characters zzTouch the characters to enter them. zzThe amount of information you can enter (1) varies depending on the function you are using. Moving the Cursor zzTouch [ ][ ] or turn the [ ] ring. Color Indicator Status Camera Status On Connected to a computer (= 164), or display off (= 27, = 153, = 153) 1 Camera Basics Blinking Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting long exposures (= 93, = 94), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Green Advanced Guide ●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. Entering Line Breaks zzTouch [ ]. Switching Input Modes zzTo switch to numbers or symbols, touch [ ]. zzTouch [ ] to enter capital letters. zzAvailable input modes vary depending on the function you are using. Deleting Characters zzTo delete the previous character, either touch [ ] or press the [ ] button. zzHolding down the [ ] button will delete five characters at a time. Index Confirming Input and Returning to the Previous Screen zzPress the [ ] button. 32 Clock Before Use You can check the current time. zzPress and hold the [ Basic Guide ] button. zzThe current time appears. Advanced Guide zzIf you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to change the display color. zzPress the [ ] button again to cancel the clock display. ●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ press the power button to display the clock. ] button, then 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 33 2 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings Before Use For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Shooting (Smart Auto) Still Images Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies 1 Turn the camera on. zzPress the power button. zzThe startup screen is displayed. Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control 2 Enter [ over shooting ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. zzAim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. zzIcons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen (= 38, = 39). zzFrames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 3 (1) Compose the shot. zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position is displayed, along with the area in focus (2).) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index (2) 34 4 Shoot. Shooting Still Images Shooting Movies 1) Focus. zzPress the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. zzSeveral AF frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus. zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. 2) Shoot. zzPress the shutter button all the way down. zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. zzKeep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. Before Use 1) Start shooting. (1) zzPress the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. zzFrames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. zzOnce recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2) Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed. zzTo resize the subject, repeat the operations in step 3. However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded. Note that movies shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy. zzWhen you recompose shots, the focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted. 3) Finish shooting. zzPress the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. zzRecording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-area White Balance). 35 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images Movies You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are later combined in a digest movie. 1 Enter [ ] mode. zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 34) and choose [ ]. 2 Compose the shot. zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 34) to compose the shot and focus. zzFor more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four seconds before shooting still images. 3 Shoot. zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 34) to shoot a still image. zzThe camera records both a still image and movie clip. The clip, which ends with the still image and a shutter sound, forms a single chapter in the digest movie. ●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because digest movies are recorded for each shot. ●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image ] mode, or immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ operating the camera in other ways. ●● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded in digest movies. ●● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed. ●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (= 152). ●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following ] mode. cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ -- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds. -- The digest movie is protected (= 114). -- Daylight saving time (= 20) or time zone (= 152) settings are changed. -- A new folder is created (= 155). ●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased. ●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Digest Type] ► [No Stills]. ●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 126). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Digest Movie Playback Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 106). Still Images/Movies ●● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the ] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then [ press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 36 Still Images ●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. ●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 196). ●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 196). ●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be activated when shooting in low-light conditions. ●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again. ●● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies (Sleeping) icons (= 38) are displayed. ●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used. ●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 52). Movies Before Use ●● Keep your fingers away from the microphone (1) while shooting movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled. Basic Guide Advanced Guide (1) ●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded. ●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (= 91). ●● Audio is recorded in stereo. ●● Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wind Filter] ► [Off]. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 37 Scene Icons ●● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ and the background color of [ ] is orange. Still Images Movies In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 39). Background Subject Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights People Moving People *2 *3 3 3 * * – – – – – – – – Shadows on Face * Smiling *3 *3 – – – 2 3 – – – 3 – – – Sleeping * 2 * Babies * Smiling Babies *3 *3 – – – 2 3 – – – 3 – – – Sleeping Babies 3 * * * Moving Children * Other Subjects *2 *3 3 3 – – *3 – – 3 Other Moving Subjects * Other Close-Range Subjects *2 * * ] is dark blue, Before Use ●● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects icons are displayed. Basic Guide ●● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects. Advanced Guide ●● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects: moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies; moving children; and other moving subjects. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes ●● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people when the flash is set to [ ]. 4 P Mode ●● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years old) are detected (= 44). Confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 20). 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving children in drive mode other than [ ] (= 39, = 43) and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected (= 49). ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 73) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness. – Index *1 Tripod Used *2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds. *3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, and gray for all other backgrounds. 38 Continuous Shooting Scenes If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed, the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous images: [ ], [ ], or [ ]. Smiling (including Babies) Sleeping (including Babies) Children Consecutive images are captured, and the camera analyzes details such as facial expressions to save the image determined to be the best. Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by combining consecutive shots to reduce camera shake and image noise. The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played. So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children who move around, the camera will capture three consecutive images for each shot. ●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images may not look as expected. ●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot. ●● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button, ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the and then select [ [ ] dial). Image Stabilization Icons Before Use Still Images Movies Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ] and [ ] modes. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Image stabilization for still images (Normal) Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)* Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is used (Hybrid IS). Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as when shooting while walking (Dynamic) Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting movies at telephoto (Powered) No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS). * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. ●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). In this case, an IS icon is not displayed. ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed. ●● In [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 39 On-Screen Frames Common, Convenient Features Still Images Before Use Movies In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at. ●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen. Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) Still Images ●● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode. Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue AF frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image brightness adjusted (Servo AF). Advanced Guide When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement. 1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ]. zzHold the lever until zooming stops. ●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 73) if no frames are displayed, if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas. Movies Basic Guide zzZooming stops at the largest possible zoom factor (before the image becomes noticeably grainy), which is then indicated on the screen. (1) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [ again. ] zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the subject. zz(1) is the current zoom factor. ●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range. -- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy. -- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus). -- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy. ●● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution settings (= 49), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 40 ●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ [Digital Zoom] ► [Off]. ] tab ► Before Use Still Images Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) Still Images Using the Self-Timer Movies You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24, 28, 35, 50, 85 or 100 mm (35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the angle of view of those focal lengths. zzTo change the focal length from 24 to 28 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise until it clicks. Keep turning the [ ] ring to increase the focal length, which changes to 35, 50, 85, and 100 mm at each click. ●● Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn the [ ] ring. ●● When you are using digital zoom (= 40), you cannot adjust the zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However, you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise. Movies With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is 2 Shoot. zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down. zzFor Movies: Press the movie button. zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound. zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking and sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzTo cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the [ ] button. zzTo restore the original setting, choose [ in step 1. 1 ] 41 Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake Still Images Movies This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) and choose [ ]. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) to shoot. Customizing the Self-Timer Still Images Movies You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. ●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. ●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) Still Images Movies With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically. 1 Enable touch-shutter function. zzPress the [ Shutter] on the [ [On] (= 30). ] button, choose [Touch ] tab, and then choose 2 Configure the setting. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the [Delay] time, either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the number of [Shots], and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) to shoot. ●● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect. 2 Shoot. zzTouch the subject on the screen, and then lift your finger immediately. zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. zzTo cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in step 1. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next shot by touching [ ]. 42 Continuous Shooting Image Display during Playback Still Images Movies In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 196). 1 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is 2 Shoot. zzHold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway. ●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 41). ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. ●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. ●● Multi-area White Balance (= 34) is not available. Similarly, [Hg Lamp Corr.] (= 49) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. ●● With Touch Shutter (= 42), the camera shoots continuously while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined for the first shot. Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the screen. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● If you erase a grouped image (= 116), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. ●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 110) and ungrouped (= 110). ●● Protecting (= 114) a grouped image will protect all images in the group. ●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image Search (= 107) or Smart Shuffle (= 113). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped. ●● The following actions are not available for grouped images: editing Face ID information (= 111), magnifying (= 112), tagging as favorites (= 118), editing (= 120), printing (= 166), setting up individual image printing (= 170), or adding to a photobook (= 171). To do these things, either view grouped images individually (= 110) or cancel grouping (= 110) first. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 43 Using Face ID If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting. This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person among a large number of images (= 108). Personal Information ●● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting images online where many others can view them. ●● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names, and birthdays) from the camera (= 48). Registering Face ID Information Before Use You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12 people to use with Face ID. Basic Guide 1 Access the setting screen. Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose [Add a New Face], and then press the [ ] button. ] 2 Register face information. zzAim the camera so that the face of the person you want to register is inside the gray frame at the center of the screen. zzA white frame on the person’s face indicates that the face is recognized. Make sure a white frame is displayed on the face, and then shoot. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot register face information. 44 5 Continue registering face information. zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. zzTo register up to 4 more points of face information (expressions or angles), repeat step 2. zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed. zzRegistered faces are more easily recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside. 3 Register the person’s name and birthday. zzPress the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter the name (= 32). zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile] screen, choose [Birthday] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to specify the date. zzWhen finished, press the [ 4 ] ] button. Save the settings. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Save], and then press the [ ] button. zzAfter a message is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The flash will not fire when following step 2. ●● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons ] mode. (= 38) will not be displayed in [ ●● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not filled all 5 face info slots (= 44). Shooting If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting. zzWhen you point the camera toward a subject, the names of up to 3 registered people will be displayed when they are detected. zzShoot. zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still images. Even if people are detected, but their names are not displayed, the names (up to 5 people) will be recorded in the image. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 45 ●● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as the registered person if they share similar facial features. ●● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or scene differs drastically from the registered face information. ●● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces. ●● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during playback (= 111). ●● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should update their face info regularly (= 44). ●● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info] check box in [Custom Display] (= 99) on the [ ] tab so that the names are not displayed. ●● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off]. ●● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple information display) (= 105). ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, ●● In [ but they will be recorded in still images. ●● Names recorded in continuous shooting (= 43, = 87) will continue to be recorded in the same position as for the first shot, even if subjects move. Checking and Editing Registered Information 1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen. zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44), choose [Check/ Edit Info] and press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Choose a person to check or edit. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the person to check or edit, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 3 Check or edit the information as needed. zzTo check a name or birthday, choose [Edit Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, you can edit names or birthdays as described in step 3 of “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44). zzTo check face information, choose [Face Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button on the screen displayed, choose face information to erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Index 46 ●● Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in previously shot images will remain the same. ●● You can use the software (= 163) to edit registered names. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images. Overwriting and Adding Face Information You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as their faces change quickly as they grow. You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been filled. 1 Access the [Add Face Info] screen. zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44), choose [Add Face Info] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose the name of the person to overwrite. 3 Choose the face info to overwrite. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the face info to overwrite, and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Register face information. zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44) to shoot, and then register the new face information. zzRegistered faces are more easily recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside. ●● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the steps above to overwrite face information. ●● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (= 46), and then register new face information (= 44) as needed. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name of a person whose face info you want to overwrite, and then press the [ ] button. zzIf five items of face info have already been registered, a message will be displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzIf less than five items of face info are registered, go to step 4 to add face information. 47 Erasing Registered Information You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased. 1 Access the [Erase Info] screen. zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44) and choose [Erase Info]. Image Customization Features Still Images Movies Advanced Guide Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen aspect ratio will be updated. 3 Other Shooting Modes zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). whose info you want to erase. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name of a person to erase, and then press the [ ] button. ●● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to display their name (= 107), overwrite their info (= 111), or search images for them (= 108). Basic Guide Changing the Aspect Ratio 2 Choose the name of the person zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices. Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes. Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes. Square aspect ratio. ●● You can also erase names in image information (= 111). Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits. Index ●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring changes the aspect ratio (= 97). ] mode. ●● Not available in [ 48 Changing Image Resolution (Size) Still Images Movies Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 195). zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps Still Images Before Use Movies In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multiarea White Balance. zzThe option you configured is now displayed. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Hg Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 30). zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] is zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size (for 3:2 Images) A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) ●● After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake. A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) 3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard For e-mailing and similar purposes ●● Not available in [ ] mode. ●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● In continuous shooting (= 43), this setting is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 49 Changing Movie Image Quality Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Before Use Movies 4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 196). zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). Basic Guide Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level Still Images Movies Advanced Guide An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is level from front to back and left to right. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode zz(1) indicates the front-back orientation and (2) the left-right orientation. 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the red line changes to green. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Display the electronic level. zzThe option you configured is now displayed. zzPress the [ ] button several times to display the electronic level. zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this ]. process but choose [ 2 Straighten the camera. Image Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details 1920 x 1080 60 fps 1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD [ ] enables movies with smoother motion 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD 640 x 480 30 fps For shooting in standard definition ●● Black bars (displayed on the top and bottom in [ ] modes and on the left and right in [ and [ indicate image areas not recorded. ], [ ], ] mode) (1) (2) ●● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the ] button, and on the [ ] tab, choose [Custom Display]. [ Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level. ●● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording. ●● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation. ●● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera (= 155). ] mode. ●● Not available in [ Index 50 Magnifying the Area in Focus Checking for Closed Eyes Still Images Movies You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame. 1 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [AFPoint Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 30). 2 Check the focus. zzPress the shutter button halfway. The face detected as the main subject is now magnified. zzTo restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter button is pressed halfway. -- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement -- When digital zoom is used (= 40) -- When a TV is used as a display (= 161) ] mode. ●● Not available in [ Before Use Still Images Movies [ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Configure the settings. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Blink Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 30). 2 Shoot. zz[ ] flashes when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed. zzTo restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this function is only available for the final shot. ●● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 52). ●● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode (= 39). ●● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (= 43, = 87). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 51 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots Customizing Camera Operation Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows. For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (= 30). Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam Still Images Still Images shooting] screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Review image after shooting] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). zzPress the [ ] button, choose [AFassist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 30). 2 Configure the settings. zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Display Time]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Quick]. Movies 1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen. Configure the setting. Advanced Guide 1 Access the [Review image after Movies You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. Basic Guide Changing the Image Display Period after Shots You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. Still Images Movies You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting. Before Use Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again. 2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec. Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again. Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway. Off No image display after shots. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then choose [Off] (= 30). zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. 52 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. 1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (= 52). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Configure the settings. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Off Displays only the image. Detailed Displays shooting details (= 180). ●● When [Display Time] (= 52) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. ●● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase images, by pressing the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 53 3 Other Shooting Modes Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot) Still Images Movies The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings. 1 Enter [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ 2 Before Use ]. Shoot. zzPress the shutter button all the way down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is played three times. zzAfter the six images are displayed in succession, they are displayed simultaneously for about two seconds. zzTo keep the images displayed until you press the shutter button halfway, press the [ ] button. For full-screen display in this state, choose an image by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button. zzTo return to the original display, press the ] button. [ ●● Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times. ●● The six images are managed together as a group (= 110). ●● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only available immediately after you shoot. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 54 Choosing Effects Still Images You can choose effects for images captured in [ Movies ] mode. zzAfter choosing [ ] mode, turn the [ ] ring to choose the effect. Specific Scenes Before Use Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. Basic Guide 1 Enter [ zzSet the mode dial to [ Auto All effects Retro Images resemble old photos Monochrome Images are generated in one color Special Bold, distinctive-looking images Natural Subdued, natural-looking images Advanced Guide ] mode. ]. 2 Choose a shooting mode. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (= 29). 3 Shoot. Shooting Portraits (Portrait) Still Images Movies zzTake shots of people with a softening effect. Shooting Evening Scenes without Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene) Still Images Movies zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or portraits with evening scenery in the background, without the need to hold the camera very still (as with a tripod). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzA single image is created by combining consecutive shots, reducing camera shake and image noise. 55 Shooting Underwater (Underwater) Still Images Movies zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and underwater scenery, when you use an optional waterproof case (= 160). zzThis mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a commercially available color-compensating filter (= 57). Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds (Snow) Still Images Movies zzBright, natural-colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds. ●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes. ●● In [ ] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (= 75) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. ●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it steady while shooting. ●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 91). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 34). ●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined. Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks) Still Images Movies zzVivid shots of fireworks. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 56 Using Functions for Underwater Shots ●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button, touching the desired focusing range, and then touching it again. Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range Still Images Movies If focusing is difficult in [ ] mode (= 55) with a focus range of [ ], using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal underwater shots. 1 Configure the setting. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose the desired focus range (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 2 Focusing Range Shoot. Description Underwater Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for Macro even closer shots. Quick Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective for moving subjects. Manual Focus Focus on subjects manually (= 81). Refer to “Shooting Range” (= 196) for details on the range of each focus range. Correcting White Balance Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Still Images Movies White balance can be manually corrected in [ ] mode (= 55). This adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available colorcompensating filter. 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose white balance. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu. 3 Adjust the setting. zzTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction level for B and A, and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. ●● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option in step 2, but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle. ●● In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear grainy at some resolutions (= 49). ] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In ●● In [ this case, try setting the focus range to [ ]. ●● B represents blue and A, amber. ●● White balance can also be manually corrected by recording custom white balance data (= 79) before following the preceding steps. 57 Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) Image Effects (Creative Filters) Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. 1 Enter [ Still Images ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ Before Use Movies Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washedout highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in highcontrast shots. ]. 2 Choose a shooting mode. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (= 29). 1 Choose [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 2 Shoot. 3 Shoot. Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid) Still Images Movies zzShots in rich, vivid colors. zzHold the camera steady as you shoot. When you press the shutter button all the way down, the camera will take three shots and combine them. ●● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. Posterized Shots (Poster Effect) Still Images Movies zzShots that resemble an old poster or illustration. ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 91). ●● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry. ●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and combines the images. ●● [ ] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in bright conditions, which indicates that the camera will automatically optimize image brightness. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 58 Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) Adding Artistic Effects zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Natural Images are natural and organic. Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast. Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations. Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges. Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark ambiance. Still Images Before Use Movies This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old photographs. Choose from five effect levels. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose an effect level. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect level. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (= 103). ●● The image aging effect is not shown in movies. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 59 Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) Still Images Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) Movies Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose an effect level. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect level. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. Still Images Movies Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded. 1 Choose [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the image area that will not be blurred. 2 Choose the area to keep in focus. zzPress the [ ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Before Use ] button. zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it. 3 For movies, choose the movie playback speed. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the speed. 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ] button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. 60 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips) Speed Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) Still Images Playback Time Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 6 sec. Before Use Movies This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. 1 Choose [ Approx. 3 sec. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. ●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the zoom before shooting. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 2 Choose a color tone. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. ●● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ] buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. ] and [ ] at ●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] (= 48). These quality settings cannot an aspect ratio of [ be changed. ●● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the screen. 3 Shoot. Standard Shots resemble toy camera images. Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 61 Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) Still Images Movies You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background. Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects and subject- and scene-based image processing. 1 Choose [ Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 2 Shoot. zzHold the camera steady as you shoot. Two consecutive images are captured when you press the shutter button all the way down. zzA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the images could not be processed. ●● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. ●● For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the subject and background. ●● There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again. ●● To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring. Still Images Before Use Movies This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose an effect level. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect level. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 62 Shooting in Monochrome Special Modes for Other Purposes Still Images Movies Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. 1 Choose [ 2 Choose a color tone. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone. zzA preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. B/W Black and white shots. Sepia Sepia tone shots. Blue Blue and white shots. Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 58) and choose [ ]. 3 Shoot. Before Use Still Images Movies Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Movies 2 The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you pressing the shutter button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Auto Shooting after Smile Detection Still Images 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed. 2 Aim the camera at a person. zzEach time the camera detects a smile, it will shoot after the lamp lights up. zzTo pause smile detection, press the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button again to resume detection. Index ●● Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected. 63 ●● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button. ●● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. zzThe camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed. zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Face the camera and wink. ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ Using the Wink Self-Timer Still Images Movies Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected. 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. zzOn the screen, touch the face of the person who will wink to choose it (Touch AF), and then press the shutter button halfway. zzThe camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame. zzTo cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately. ●● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses. ●● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink. ●● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. ●● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ zzMake sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink. 64 4 Join the subjects in the shooting Using the Face Self-Timer Still Images Movies The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area (= 84). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots. 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Compose the shot and press the area and look at the camera. zzAfter the camera detects a new face, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzTo cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. shutter button halfway. zzMake sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces. 3 Press the shutter button all the way ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ down. zzThe camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 65 5 Have the person stay still until the Shooting Starry Skies (Star) lamp blinks. Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) Still Images Movies Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially firing the flash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without flash. The three images are combined into a single image and processed to make the stars more prominent. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 196). zzThe person you are shooting should stay still until the lamp blinks three times after the third shot, which may take up to about two seconds. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzAll the shots are combined to create a single image. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzMove the [ ] switch. 8 Setting Menu 3 Secure the camera. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. 2 Raise the flash. ●● Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as expected. ●● For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination such as street lights, and make sure the flash is raised. ●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images. ●● To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps 4 – 5 stays still. zzMount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. 4 Shoot. zzPress the shutter button. The flash fires as the camera takes the first shot. Index zzThe second and third shots are now taken, without firing the flash. 66 ●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night Display] ► [On] (= 92) before shooting. ●● To adjust subject brightness, try changing the flash exposure compensation (= 89). ●● To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure compensation (= 74). However, images may not look as expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds. ●● To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility] ► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds. ●● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off]. ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape) Still Images Movies Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful. 1 Choose [ ]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. 2 Secure the camera. zzMount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. 3 Shoot. ●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 67 ●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night Display] ► [On] (= 92) before shooting. ●● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off]. ●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 81) to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting. ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) Still Images Movies Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about two hours. Check the battery level in advance. 1 Choose [ 2 Specify the duration of the shooting session. zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting duration. 3 Secure the camera. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzMount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. 4 Shoot. zzPress the shutter button all the way down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and then shooting begins. zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting. zzTo cancel shooting, press the shutter button all the way down again. Note that cancellation may take up to about 60 seconds. ●● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a composite image created from the images up to that point is saved. ●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images. ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. ●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night Display] ► [On] (= 92) before shooting. ●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 81) to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ 68 5 Shoot. Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie) Still Images Movies By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the shooting interval and recording duration as needed. Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check the battery level and memory card space in advance. 1 Choose [ zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting. zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie button again. Note that cancellation may take up to about 60 seconds. ]. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 55) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. 2 Configure movie settings. zzPress the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item. Choose the desired option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Secure the camera. zzMount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. 4 Check the brightness. zzPress the shutter button all the way down to shoot a single still image. zzSwitch to Playback mode (= 103) and check image brightness. zzTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure compensation dial and change the exposure level. Check brightness again by taking another shot. Before Use zzPress the movie button. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and then shooting begins. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzThe camera operates in Eco mode (= 153) while shooting. Item Options Effect Shot Interval 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min. Frame Rate Shooting Time Details Choose movie effects, such as star trails. Choose the interval between each shot. Choose the movie frame rate. 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., Unlimited Choose the length of the recording session. To record until the battery runs out, choose [Unlimited]. Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a one-hour session) Interval between Shots Frame Rate Playback Time 15 sec. 16 sec. 15 sec. 8 sec. 30 sec. 8 sec. 30 sec. 4 sec. 1 min. 4 sec. 1 min. 2 sec. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 69 ●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images. ●● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space, shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point is saved. ●● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects: [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]. ●● Sound is not recorded. ●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night Display] ► [On] (= 92) before shooting. ●● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting]. ●● To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose Stills] ► [On]. Note MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Save that these individual images are managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is displayed. To indicate that ] is displayed in the upper left the image is part of a group, [ of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (= 116), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. ●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 81) to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting. ●● Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] and use an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 159), shooting will stop after about 8 hours, at most. ●● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps ] to access 1 – 2 of “Specific Scenes” (= 55), touching [ the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same ]. option or [ Adjusting Colors Before Use Still Images Colors can be manually adjusted in [ Movies ] mode. 1 Choose a shooting mode. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzChoose [ ] (= 66), [ ] (= 67), [ ] (= 68), or [ ] (= 69). 2 Choose color adjustment. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 29). 3 Adjust the setting. zzTurn the [ ] ring or press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the correction level for B and A, and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ●● B represents blue and A, amber. ●● Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [ ●● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [ button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (= 79). ] is ] mode. ] ●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in step 2. ] when the ●● Advanced settings can be accessed by touching [ screen in step 2 is displayed (= 79). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 70 Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting Shooting Various Movies Still Images Movies Shooting Movies in Standard Mode Still Images 1 Enter [ Movies Movies 1 Lock the exposure. zzTouch [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] to lock the exposure. zzTo unlock the exposure, touch [ ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ Still Images You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops. Before Use ] again. ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. 2 Configure the settings to suit the movie (= 181). 3 Shoot. 2 Adjust the exposure. zzTouch [ ] on the screen. zzTouch [ ][ ] to adjust the exposure. 3 Shoot (= 71). ●● The exposure compensation dial cannot be used. zzPress the movie button. zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie button again. ●● You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ then displayed. ]. [ ●● You can also adjust the exposure by turning the [ ] ring before recording. ] is 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 71 Shooting iFrame Movies Before Use Still Images Movies Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies using the software (= 163). 1 Choose [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). zzBlack bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. 2 Shoot (= 71). ●● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc. ] (= 50) and cannot be changed. ●● The resolution is [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 72 4 P Mode More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style ●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [ ] mode. Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Still Images Before Use Movies You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style. 1 Enter [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. 2 Customize the settings as desired (= 74 – = 92), and then shoot. ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 75) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 88), which may enable adequate exposure. ●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the movie button. However, some FUNC. (= 29) and MENU (= 30) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording. ●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure ●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode (= 181). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 73 Image Brightness (Exposure) Before Use ●● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 42). Basic Guide Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Still Images ●● AE: Auto Exposure ●● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial (Program Shift). Movies The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments, in a range of –3 to +3. zzAs you watch the screen, turn the exposure compensation dial to adjust brightness. zzThe correction level you specified is now displayed. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies 3 Other Shooting Modes Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows. 4 P Mode zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 2 9). 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzThe option you configured is now displayed. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Changing the Metering Method Still Images Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) Still Images Movies Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and exposure separately. Evaluative zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Center Weighted Avg. Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important. zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is locked. Spot Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 75). 1 Lock the exposure. zzTo unlock AE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. Advanced Guide Index 2 Compose the shot and shoot. 74 Changing the ISO Speed Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame Still Images Before Use Movies 1 Set the metering method to [ Still Images Movies zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the ISO speed. ]. zzFollow the steps in “Changing the Metering Method” (= 74) to choose [ ]. zzThe option you configured is now displayed. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Spot AE Point] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [AF Point] (= 30). AUTO Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions. zzThe Spot AE Point frame will now be linked to the movement of the AF frame (= 84). 125, 160, 200 Low For shooting outdoors in fair weather. 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800 Slightly Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight. 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400 Slightly High 8000, 10000, 12800 High ●● Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (= 84). Basic Guide Advanced Guide For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. ●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway. ●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in some shooting conditions. ●● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy. ●● You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the [ ] button, choosing [ ], choosing an option (either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial), and then pressing the [ ] button. To specify [AUTO], press the [ ] button on the setting screen. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 75 Adjusting ISO Auto Settings Still Images Movies When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of three levels. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ISO Auto Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) Before Use You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low]. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [High ISO NR] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 30). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Configure the setting. zzChoose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 30). ●● Not available with [ ] or [ ] (= 90). Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) Still Images ●● You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when choosing the ISO speed in the FUNC. menu, by pressing the ] button. [ Movies Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels (standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3stop increments. 1 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). 2 Configure the setting. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. 76 ●● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (= 88). ●● Continuous shooting (= 87) is not available in this mode. ●● You can also correct existing images (= 123). ●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (= 97). ●● If exposure compensation is already in use (= 74), the value specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function. ●● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing ] button when the exposure compensation screen the [ (= 74) is displayed. ●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [ ] (= 42). ●● In [Blink Detection] mode (= 51), this function is only available for the final shot. ●● To access the setting screen in step 2, you can either touch ] on the exposure [ ] on the screen in step 1 or touch [ compensation screen (= 74). ●● You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [ ]. Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) 1 Camera Basics Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as follows. 2 zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes zzThe option you configured is now displayed. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Still Images Options Movies Available ISO Speed (= 75) Details – Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out highlights [AUTO], [125] – [12800] Tone down highlights by about 200% relative to the brightness level of [ ]. [AUTO], [250] – [6400] Movies Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct. ●● ISO speed (= 75) will be adjusted to a speed within the supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported range indicated here. Index ●● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. 77 Shadow Correct Still Images Movies Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is Image Colors Before Use Basic Guide Adjusting White Balance Still Images Movies Advanced Guide By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting. 1 Camera Basics zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Using the ND Filter zzThe option you configured is now displayed. To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to 3 stops). zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is ●● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 91). ●● ND: Neutral Density Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting conditions. 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. 6 Playback Mode Shade For shooting in the shade. Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight. 7 Wi-Fi Functions Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting. 8 Setting Menu Fluorescent For shooting under white fluorescent lighting. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting. Flash For shooting with the flash. Underwater For shooting underwater (= 55). Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (= 79). Index 78 2 Configure advanced settings. Custom White Balance Still Images Movies For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (= 78) to choose [ ] or [ ]. zzAim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press the [ ] button. zzThe tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. ●● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data. ●● You can also record white balance data on the screen above by touching [ ]. Manually Correcting White Balance Still Images zzTo configure more advanced settings, press the [ ] button and adjust the correction level by turning the [ ] ring or [ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzTo reset the correction level, press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ the setting. ] button to complete ●● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option (by following steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (= 78)), but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data. ●● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green ●● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the [ ] ring (= 97). ●● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter density) Movies You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or colorcompensating filter. 1 Configure the setting. zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (= 78) to choose [ ]. ●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2. ] in ●● You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [ step 1. ] to restore the ●● On the screen in step 2, you can touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen. original level and touch [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction level for B and A. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. 79 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Movies Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). zzThe option you configured is now displayed. – My Colors Off Vivid Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper. Neutral Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images. Sepia Creates sepia tone images. ●● White balance (= 78) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes. ●● With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may change. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Custom Color Still Images Movies Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. 1 Access the setting screen. zzFollow the steps in “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 80) to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then specify the value by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. B/W Creates black and white images. Positive Film Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film. Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones. Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones. zzFor stronger/more intense effects (or darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/lighter effects (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left. Vivid Blue Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid. zzPress the [ setting. Vivid Green Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and other green subjects more vivid. Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid. Custom Color Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other qualities as desired (= 80). ] button to complete the 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar. 80 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode Shooting Range and Focusing Before Use Still Images Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) Still Images Movies To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 196). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzTo adjust the magnification, press the [ ] button. 8 Setting Menu zzDuring magnified display, you can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Choose [ zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. zz[ ] and the MF indicator are displayed. 2 Specify the general focal position. ●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. ●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 42). (1) ●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button, touching [ ], and then touching it again. Movies When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 196). zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator bar (1, which shows the distance and focal position) and the magnified display area, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to specify the general focal position, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Fine-tune the focus. zzPress the shutter button halfway to have the camera fine-tune the focal position (Safety MF). Index 81 ●● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (= 83) is [1-point] and AF frame size (= 84) is [Normal], and these settings cannot be changed. ●● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 40) or digital tele-converter (= 83), or when using a TV as a display (= 161), but the magnified display will not appear. ●● You can also adjust the focus by turning the [ ] ring (= 97). ●● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it. ●● You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings. ●● To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed halfway, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Safety MF] ► [Off]. ●● You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ then displayed. ]. [ ] is Before Use Basic Guide Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) Still Images Movies Advanced Guide Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your specified focus can be set in three levels. 1 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) Still Images ●● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots. Movies Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection as needed. ●● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (= 88). ●● Continuous shooting (= 87) is not available in this mode. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [MF Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. zzChoose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 30). ●● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the ] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” [ (= 81). ●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [ ] (= 42). ●● In [Blink Detection] mode (= 51), this function is only available for the final shot. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 82 ●● To access the screen in step 2, you can either touch [ ] on the ] on the manual focus screen screen in step 1 or touch [ (= 81). ●● You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [ ]. Changing the AF Frame Mode Before Use Still Images Movies Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [AF Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 30). Digital Tele-Converter Still Images Basic Guide Advanced Guide Movies The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or 2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 30). zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor is displayed on the screen. ●● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (= 40) or AF-point zoom (= 51). ●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom ] for maximum telephoto, and when lever all the way toward [ you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 40). 1-point Still Images Movies One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (= 86). ●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock). ●● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway and [AF-Point Zoom] (= 51) is set to [On]. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 83 Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point) Still Images ●● On the screen in step 2, you can also move the AF frame by touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position ], or exit the setting by touching [ ]. by touching [ Movies When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF frame mode to [1-point]. 1 Move the AF frame. zzTo return the AF frame to the original position in the center, press the [ button. 2 Resize the AF frame. zzTo reduce the AF frame size, turn the [ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the original size. 3 Finish the setup process. zzPress the [ ] button. ●● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital zoom (= 40) or digital tele-converter (= 83), and in manual focus mode (= 81). ●● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 75). ●● You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the ] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab [ (= 30). 1 Camera Basics ●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only). 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Still Images zzYou can turn the [ ] dial to move the AF frame and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to fine-tune the position. ] Basic Guide Advanced Guide Face AiAF zzTouch the screen. An AF frame is displayed in orange where you touched (Touch AF). Before Use Movies ●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. ●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus. ●● When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio (= 48) setting. ] or [ ]: 31 frames -- [ ] or [ ]: 25 frames -- [ ]: 21 frames -- [ ●● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 85) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected: -- Subjects that are distant or extremely close -- Subjects that are dark or light -- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden ●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. ●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. Index 84 Changing the Focus Setting Shooting with Servo AF Still Images Movies This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway. 1 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ AF] on the [ (= 30). Before Use Still Images Movies You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 30). ] button, choose [Servo ] tab, and then choose [On] 2 Focus. zzThe focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. ●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. ●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode. ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. ●● AF lock shooting is not available. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 30) is not available. ●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 41). On Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly. Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) Still Images Movies You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on. 1 Prepare the camera for Face Select. zzSet the AF frame to [Face AiAF] (= 84). zzAssign [ ] to the [ ] button (= 99). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 85 2 Enter Face Select mode. zzAim the camera at the person’s face and press the [ ] button. zzAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a face frame [ ] is displayed around the face detected as the main subject. zzEven if the subject moves, the face frame [ ] follows the subject within a certain range. zzIf a face is not detected, [ displayed. ] is not 3 Choose the face to focus on. zzTo switch the face frame [ detected face, press the [ ] to another ] button. zzAfter you have switched the face frame to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed, and the specified AF frame mode screen is displayed again. 4 Shoot. Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) Still Images Before Use Movies You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on. 1 Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF] Advanced Guide (= 84). 2 Choose a person’s face or another subject to focus on. zzTouch the subject or person on the screen. zzWhen the subject is detected, the camera beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is maintained even if the subject moves. zzTo cancel Touch AF, touch [ ]. 3 Shoot. zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ]. zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a green [ ]. zzPress the shutter button all the way down to shoot. zzPress the shutter button all the way down to shoot. ●● When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on. However, their names will be recorded in the still images (= 44). Basic Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 86 ●● If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen, make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the ] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ ] tab, and [ then choose [Off] (= 30). ●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between subjects and the background. ●● Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (= 81), the camera will revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to focus. ●● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (= 44). However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID. Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in Focus Still Images Movies Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 196). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is 2 Shoot. Shooting with the AF Lock Still Images Movies The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button. 1 Lock the focus. zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. zzThe focus is now locked, and [ the MF indicator are displayed. ] and zzTo unlock the focus, hold the shutter button halfway down and press the [ ] button again. 2 Compose the shot and shoot. zzHold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. zzThe images are managed together as a group (= 110). ●● In [ ] mode (= 55), manual focus mode (= 81), or when AF is locked (= 87), [ ] is changed to [ ]. ●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 41). ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. ●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. ●● With Touch Shutter (= 42), the camera shoots continuously while you touch the screen. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 42). 87 Slow Synchro Flash Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range. Changing the Flash Mode Still Images ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 91). ●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. Movies You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 196). 1 Raise the flash. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzMove the [ ] switch. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose a flash mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzThe option you configured is now displayed. ●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting. Off For shooting without the flash. ●● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. ●● Adjustment is also possible by pressing the [ ] button, touching the desired option, and then touching it again. Auto Fires automatically in low-light conditions. On 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Fires for each shot. 88 Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation Still Images Shooting with the FE Lock Movies Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 74), you can adjust the flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments. zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose the compensation level, and then press the [ ] button. zzThe correction level you specified is now displayed. ●● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off]. ●● You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp]. ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 30) when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately ] button. pressing the [ ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 30) ]. by pressing the [ ] button and touching [ Before Use Still Images Movies Just as with the AE lock (= 74), you can lock the exposure for the flash shots. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Raise the flash and set it to [ ] (= 88). 2 Lock the flash exposure. zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. zzThe flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed, the flash output level is retained. zzTo unlock FE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Compose the shot and shoot. zzAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ no longer displayed. ] is ●● FE Lock cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 42) or Touch AF (= 86), because touching the screen will cancel FE Lock. ●● FE: Flash Exposure 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 89 Changing the Flash Timing Shooting RAW Images Still Images Movies Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. Before Use Still Images Movies RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use Digital Photo Professional (= 163) to adjust RAW images as desired with minimal loss of image quality. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). zzChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose the desired option (= 30). 1st-curtain The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. 2nd-curtain The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes. Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality. Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality. For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 195). Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot. The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the software. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 90 ●● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated software (= 163). ●● With [ ] or [ ], the noise reduction level (= 76), i-Contrast (= 77), and My Colors (= 80) cannot be configured. ●● The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for RAW images is .CR2. Other Settings Before Use Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) Still Images Movies Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 195). zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). Changing the IS Mode Settings Still Images Movies 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [IS Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [IS Mode] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option (= 30). Continuous 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 39). Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting. Off Deactivates image stabilization. * The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording. 91 ●● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting Still Images Movies Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can choose not to reduce significant camera shake. zzFollow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode Settings” (= 91) to access the [IS Settings] screen. Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen Information Still Images Before Use Movies Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is useful in modes such as [ ] (= 66). Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Night Display] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 30). ●● The color is not adjusted in Playback mode. zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose [2] (= 30). ●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 92 5 Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode) Still Images Before Use Movies Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (= 197). 1 Enter [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. 2 Set the shutter speed. Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed. Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style ●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode. Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (= 75) 15 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200] 1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800] ●● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise. ●● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). ●● The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the flash fires. ●● Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 94). ●● Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy. ●● [ ]: Time value ●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ changes the shutter speed (= 97). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] dial 93 Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) Still Images Movies Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value. For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (= 197). 1 Enter [ ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ 2 ]. Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) Still Images 1 Enter [ Advanced Guide ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value. ●● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens) ●● To avoid exposure problems in [ ] and [ ] modes, you can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise ] button and set [Safety Shift] on be obtained. Press the [ the [ ] tab to [On] (= 30). However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires. ●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial changes the aperture value (= 97). Basic Guide Movies Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure. For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter Speed” (= 197) and “Aperture” (= 197). Set the aperture value. ●● Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below). Before Use ]. 2 Configure the setting. zzTurn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed (1), and turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value (2). (1) (2) (3) (4) Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (= 75) 250 – 40 [125] 30 – 1.3 [125] – [3200] 1 – 1/2000 [125] – [12800] 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot. ●● Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ]. ●● Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy. 94 ●● [ ]: Manual ●● At ISO speeds other than [ ], an exposure level mark (4) based on your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for comparison to the standard exposure level (3). [ ] or [ ] is displayed when the difference from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops. ●● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method (= 74). ●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [ ] dial adjusts the aperture value (= 97). ●● You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output]. ] or [ ] mode by ●● You can also set the flash level in [ accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► [Manual]. ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 30) when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately ] button. pressing the [ Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 30) ]. by pressing the [ ] button and touching [ Adjusting the Flash Output Still Images Choose from the three flash levels in [ 1 Enter [ Movies ] mode. ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. 2 Specify the flash mode. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Flash Mode], press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Manual], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Configure the setting. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose the flash level, and then press the [ ] button. zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash output level is displayed. ]: Medium, [ ]: [ ]: Minimum, [ Maximum 95 Setup via Touch Operations Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values Still Images Movies Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed. For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (= 197), “Aperture” (= 197), and “Changing the ISO Speed” (= 75). 1 Enter [ Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed using touch operations. Settings can also be adjusted during recording. zzTouch [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the screen, and then touch [ ][ ] to specify a value. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode. zzSet the mode dial to [ ]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29). 2 Before Use ●● Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be recorded. Configure the settings. zzTurn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed. zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 29). ●● With [ ], the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button is pressed halfway, showing the difference from the standard exposure level. ●● With settings other than [ ], an exposure level mark based on your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for comparison to the standard exposure level. ●● Setup is not possible during recording by turning the [ [ ] ring. ] dial or ●● Exposure can be locked before or during recording by touching [ ]. ] is ●● Focus can be locked during recording by touching [ ]. [ then displayed. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 96 Functions Assignable to the Control Ring Customization for Shooting Styles Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting mode, and those assignments determine which functions you can assign to the control dial. Changing Control Ring Settings Still Images Movies Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera. [ ] ring. ] button. 2 Av Tv ISO – – – ISO ISO ISO Av Tv – Focus manually (= 81) zzChoose an option, either by pressing the [ ] or [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the [ ] ring or [ ] dial. zzPress the [ setting. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Shooting Mode Item 1 Choose a function to assign to the zzPress the [ Before Use Correct white balance (= 79) Perform step zooming (= 41) ] button to complete the Configure dynamic range (= 77) Enable or disable shadow correction (= 78) Configure the assigned function. zzTurn the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to configure the assigned function. ●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button, touching an option to choose it, and then touching it again. Adjust the aspect ratio (= 48) – Assign functions as desired (= 98) ●● ISO: ISO speed (= 75); MF: manual focus (= 81); Tv: shutter speed (= 93); Av: aperture value (= 94). ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to the [ ] ring, ●● When you assign [ the functions you can assign to the [ ] dial are the same as for [ ]. ●● Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current shooting mode or under current function conditions. ], [ ], or ●● The [ ] ring can be used for step zooming in [ movie mode (= 41). ●● In [ ] mode, you can assign aperture value or shutter speed adjustment to the ring. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 97 Using the Control Ring for Adjustment Assigning Functions to the Control Ring Still Images Movies Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode. 1 Choose [ ]. zzFollowing step 1 in “Changing Control Ring Settings” (= 97), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. Still Images Before Use Movies You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen to switch between these items. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzTouch the right edge (in the area outlined, in this example) to view menu items, drag up or down to choose an item, and turn the [ ] ring to specify a value. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the shooting mode with functions to assign. (1) zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] ring to choose a function to assign to the control ring (1). zzFunctions you can assign to the control dial will be updated automatically. ] button to return to the zzPress the [ shooting screen. ●● You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and ] in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings” touching [ (= 97). ●● On the setting screen, you can also configure the functions assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then ]. [ Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Note that the functions ], and assigned to the control ring (= 97) are not displayed in [ ], [ [ ] modes. ISO Tv Av ISO Av ISO Tv ISO ●● ISO: ISO speed (= 75); Tv: shutter speed (= 93); Av: aperture value (= 94). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 98 Customizing Display Information Still Images Movies Set the number of custom displays (= 29) and what information is displayed in each display when the [ ] button is pressed in shooting screen. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Custom Display] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then press the [ ] button. Items you choose for display are labeled with [ ]. zzSelected items (labeled with a [ be included in display. Shooting Info Displays shooting information (= 179). Grid Lines Displays a reference grid. ]) will Displays a histogram (= 105) in [ [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes. ], [ Basic Guide Assigning Functions to Buttons Still Images Movies You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [ movie button. Advanced Guide ] or 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Set button] or [Set button] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a function to assign, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Use the assigned function as needed. zzTo activate an assigned function, press the button you assigned it to. Electronic Level Displays the electronic level (= 50). Histogram Before Use ●● You can also choose an item to display by touching it. ], [ ], ●● Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings screen. ●● Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be displayed in some shooting modes. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. 99 ●● To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set button] and button]. [ ] in [Set ●● Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current shooting mode or under current function conditions. ], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the ●● With [ [ ] button in [1-point] AF frame mode (= 83, = 84). ●● With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data (= 79), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ]. ], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks ●● With [ ] is then displayed. the focus. [ ●● With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following. -- Press any button other than the power button -- Hold the camera in another orientation -- Open or close the screen -- Raise or lower the flash ●● You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even if you assign a function to the movie button. ●● You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and ]. then touching it again or touching [ Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout) Before Use Basic Guide The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown on this menu will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen. Advanced Guide Choosing Items to Include in the Menu Still Images Movies 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 2 Choose icons to include in the menu. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial and then press the [ ] button to choose icons to include in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked with a [ ]. zzSelected items (labeled with a [ be included in display. ]) will zzItems without a [ ] will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen. 3 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 100 ●● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the [ ] button when the FUNC. menu is displayed. ●● Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu (= 102), and then add to the FUNC. menu again will be removed from My Menu. Rearranging Menu Items 1 Access the setting screen. zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing Items to Include in the Menu” (= 100), press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ] or [ ] button to choose an icon to move. Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the new position, and then press the [ ] or [ ] button. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Saving Shooting Settings Before Use Still Images Movies Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Settings that can be saved ●● Shooting mode ([ ], [ ●● Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ], or [ ]) ] modes (= 74 – = 94) ●● Shooting menu settings ●● Zoom positions ●● Manual focus positions (= 81) ●● My Menu settings (= 102) 1 Enter a shooting mode with settings you want to save, and change the settings as desired. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Save Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Save the settings. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 101 ●● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting details are not applied in other shooting modes. ●● To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default values, turn the mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All] (= 157). Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) Still Images Movies You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ] tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from a single screen. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [My Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). 3 Rearrange menu items, as needed. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Sort], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose a menu item to move (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial), and then press the [ ] button. ] Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to change the order, and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ] button. ●● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not be available in some shooting modes. ●● To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the ] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and [ press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes]. ●● On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can also touch items to select them. ●● On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the display order. 2 Configure the setting. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Select items], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose up to five menu items to save (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zz[ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] is displayed. zzTo cancel saving, press the [ [ ] is no longer displayed. zzPress the [ ] button. ] button. 102 6 Playback Mode Before Use Still Images Movies Basic Guide After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. Advanced Guide 1 Enter Playback mode. zzPress the [ ] button. zzYour last shot is displayed. 2 Browse through your images. Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways ●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ button to enter Playback mode. Viewing ] ●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras. zzTo view the previous image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial clockwise. zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images quickly. zzTo access this screen (Scroll Display mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through images. zzTo return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. zzTo browse images grouped by shooting date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll Display mode. zzMovies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] icon. 103 3 Play movies. zzTo start playback, press the [ ] button to access the movie control panel, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. Touch-Screen Operations Before Use zzTo view the next image, drag left across the screen, and to view the previous image, drag right. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Adjust the volume. zzPress the [ volume. ][ ] buttons to adjust the zzTo adjust the volume when the volume indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. (1) 5 Pause playback. zzTo pause or resume playback, press the [ ] button. zzAfter the movie is finished, [ displayed. ] is ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. ] tab ●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off]. ●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback ] tab ► [Resume] ► [Last mode, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ shot]. ●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU ] tab ► (= 30) and choose your desired effect on the [ [Transition Effect]. 1 Camera Basics zzTo access Scroll Display mode, quickly drag left or right repeatedly. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzYou can also choose images in Scroll Display mode by dragging left or right. 3 Other Shooting Modes zzTouching the central image will restore single-image display. 4 P Mode zzTo browse images grouped by shooting date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or down. 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ] in step 6 Playback Mode zzTo adjust the volume during movie playback, quickly drag up or down across the screen. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix zzTo start movie playback, touch [ 2 of “Viewing” (= 103). zzTo stop playback, touch the screen. The screen at left is displayed, and the camera is ready for your next operation. zzTouch [ ] to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed. zzTo switch frames, touch the scrollbar or drag left or right. Index zzTo resume playback, touch [ ]. zzTouch [ ] to return to the screen in step 2 of “Viewing” (= 103). 104 Switching Display Modes Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) Still Images Movies Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (= 180). Still Images Simple Information Display Movies Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (= 105). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Histogram Still Images No Information Display Before Use Movies zzThe graph in detailed information display (= 105) is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure. zzThe histogram can also be accessed while shooting (= 99, = 179). RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display Still Images Detailed Information Display RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display Movies zzThe RGB histogram shows the distribution of shades of red, green, and blue in an image. The horizontal axis represents R, G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at that level of brightness. Viewing this histogram enables you to check image color characteristics. zzUsing a smartphone connected to the camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images on the camera, adding information such as latitude, longitude, and elevation (= 147). You can review this information in the GPS information display. zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC (shooting date and time) are listed from top to bottom. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 105 ●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly. ●● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the camera with information display deactivated (= 105). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time ●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information. ●● You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the screen in step 1 and touching [OK] on the screen in step 2. Viewing by Date ●● You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of the screen upward or downward in detailed information display. Digest movies can be viewed by date. 1 Choose a movie. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [List/ Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and then choose a date (= 30). Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies) Still Images View digest movies recorded automatically in [ day of still image shooting as follows. Movies ] mode (= 36) on a 2 Play the movie. zzPress the [ ] button to start playback. 1 Choose an image. zzChoose a still image labeled with [ ] and press the [ ] button. 2 Play the movie. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose [OK]. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] zzThe movie recorded automatically on the day of still image shooting is played back, from the beginning. 106 Checking People Detected in Face ID Still Images Browsing and Filtering Images Before Use Movies If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 105), the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 44) will be displayed. zzPress the [ ] button several times until simple information display is activated, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image. zzNames will be displayed on detected people. ●● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using ] tab ► [Face ID Info] Face ID, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ► [Name Display] ► [Off]. Basic Guide Navigating through Images in an Index Still Images Movies Advanced Guide By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for. 1 Display images in an index. zzMove the zoom lever toward [ ] to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown. zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever. 2 Choose an image. zzTurn the [ images. zzPress the [ an image. ] dial to scroll through the ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose zzAn orange frame is displayed around the selected image. zzPress the [ ] button to view the selected image in single-image display. ●● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU ] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off]. (= 30) ► [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 107 1 Choose [Image Search]. Touch-Screen Operations zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Image Search] on the [ ] tab (= 30). zzPinch in to switch from single-image display to index display. zzTo view more thumbnails per screen, pinch in again. 2 Choose the first condition for image zzTouch an image to choose it, and touch it again to view it in single-image display. Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions Movies Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect (= 114) or delete (= 116) these images all at once. Displays images tagged as favorites (= 118). Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. People Displays images with detected faces. Still image/ Movie Name Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ mode (= 36). Displays images of a registered person (= 44). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode zzWhen you have selected [ ] or [ ] as the first condition, choose the second by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then turn the [ ] dial to view only matching images. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu zzTo switch to filtered image display, press the [ ] button and go to step 4. 9 Accessories zzWhen you have selected [ ] as the first condition, press the [ ] button, and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the next screen to choose a person. 10 Appendix display or navigation. zzTo view fewer thumbnails per screen, spread your fingers apart. Favorites Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzDrag up or down on the screen to scroll through displayed images. Still Images Before Use ] zzPress the [ ][ display filter. ] buttons to choose a zzWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can view only images matching this condition by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all of these images together, press the [ ] button and go to step 4. 3 Choose the second condition and check the images found. Index 108 4 View the filtered images. zzImages matching your conditions are displayed in yellow frames. To view only these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial. zzTo cancel filtered display, press the [ button. ] ●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some conditions, those conditions will not be available. ●● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 4. ●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 4) include “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 107), “Magnifying Images” (= 112), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 112). You can also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing [Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 114) or [Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 116), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 169), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 171). ●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 120 – = 125), a message is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown. ●● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps 2 and 3. ●● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your conditions by touching a condition again. Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images Still Images Before Use Movies Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Jump to Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 118). 1 Camera Basics Jump Shot Date Jumps to the first image in each group of images that were shot on the same date. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time. Jump 100 Images 3 Other Shooting Modes Jumps by 100 images at a time. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Choose a condition. zzChoose a condition (or jump method) in single-image display by turning the [ ] ring and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 2 View images matching your specified condition, or jump by the specified amount. zzTurn the [ ] ring to view only images matching the condition or jump by the specified number of images forward or back. Index 109 Touch-Screen Operations zzYou can also jump to the previous or next image according to your jump method chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images” (= 109) by dragging left or right with two fingers. ●● Turning the [ ] ring when browsing images in index display will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ]. ●● During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 107) and magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 112). By choosing [Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (= 114) or [All Images in Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 116), or “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 169), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 171), all images in the group can be manipulated at once. ●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single ] tab ► [Group still images, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ Images] ► [Off] (= 30). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback. ] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying ●● In [ a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (= 54) is only shown immediately after you shoot. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Viewing Individual Images in a Group Still Images Movies Images shot continuously (= 43, = 87), images shot in [ ] mode (= 54), and individual still images saved as source data in [ ] mode (= 69) are grouped, and only the first image is displayed. However, you can also view the images individually. ●● You can also view group images individually by touching [ on the screen in step 1. ] 1 Choose a grouped image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image labeled with [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 View images in the group 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index individually. zzPressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial will display only images in the group. zzPressing the [ ] button will display [Display all images]. Press [ ] to cancel group playback. 110 4 Choose the name of the person to Editing Face ID Information overwrite with. zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding Face Information” (= 47) to choose the name of the person you want to overwrite with. If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or erase it. However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been erased. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button and choose ] tab (= 30). [Face ID Info] on the [ Advanced Guide Erasing Names ] 2 Choose an image. zzFollowing the procedure in “Checking People Detected in Face ID” (= 107), choose an image and press the [ ] button. zzAn orange frame is displayed around the selected face. When multiple names are displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name to change, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose the editing option. Basic Guide ●● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an ] to display the image on the screen in step 2, touching [ orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name. ●● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3. Changing Names zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use zzFollowing step 3 in “Changing Names” (= 111), choose [Erase] and press the [ ] button. zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is displayed. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and then press the [ ] button. 111 Touch-Screen Operations Image Viewing Options Magnifying Images Still Images 1 Movies Magnify an image. zzMoving the zoom lever toward [ ] will zoom in and magnify the image. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever. Before Use zzSpread your fingers apart (pinch out) to zoom in. Basic Guide zzYou can magnify images up to about 10x by repeating this action. Advanced Guide zzTo move the display position, drag across the screen. zzPinch in to zoom out. zzTouch [ display. ] to restore single-image zzThe approximate position of the displayed area (1) is shown for reference. zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it. (1) 2 Move the display position and switch images as needed. zzTo move the display position, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. zzTo switch to other images while zoomed, turn the [ ] dial. ●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by ] button. pressing the [ ] is displayed by pressing ●● You can check the focus when [ the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check). When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button repeatedly to switch to other positions. Viewing Slideshows Still Images Movies Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Configure the setting. zzChoose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 30). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 112 3 Start automatic playback. 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Start], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading image] is displayed for a few seconds. zzPress the [ slideshow. ] button to stop the ●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 27) are deactivated during slideshows. ●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button. ●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fastrewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down. ●● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen. Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Still Images Movies Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the image you want to view next. zzYour chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzFor full-screen display of the center image, press the [ ] button. To restore the original display, press the [ ] button again. ] button to restore zzPress the [ single-image display. ●● Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases: -- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera -- An unsupported image is currently displayed -- Images are shown in filtered display (= 108) -- During group playback (= 110) ●● On the screen in step 2, touching an image above, below, or on either side will show your chosen image in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. ●● For full-screen display of the center image in step 2, touch that image. To restore the original display, touch the screen again. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 1 Choose Smart Shuffle. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Smart Shuffle] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 30). zzFour candidate images are displayed. 113 Choosing Images Individually Protecting Images Still Images Movies Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera (= 116). Choosing a Selection Method 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button and choose [Protect] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Choose a selection method. zzChoose a menu item and an option as desired (= 30). zzTo return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ ●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card (= 154, = 154). ●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection. 1 Choose [Select]. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 114), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. zzRepeat this process to specify other images. 3 Protect the image. zzPress the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. ●● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching ]. [ ●● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in step 3. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 114 4 Protect the images. Selecting a Range 1 Choose [Select Range]. zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Protect], and then press the [ ] button. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 114), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a starting image. zzPress the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed. ●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4. ●● You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3. ●● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen in step 4. Protecting All Images at Once 3 Choose an ending image. zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Last image], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Choose [Protect All Images]. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 114), choose [Protect All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Protect the images. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. zzImages before the first image cannot be selected as the last image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Clearing All Protection at Once You can clear protection from all images at once. To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2. 115 Erasing Multiple Images at Once Erasing Images Still Images Movies You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 114) cannot be erased. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choosing a Selection Method 1 Choose an image to erase. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 114) cannot be erased. Before Use ] 2 Erase the image. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (= 30). zzPress the [ ] button. zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe current image is now erased. zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Pressing the [ ] button while [ ] images are displayed will ], or give you the option of choosing [Erase ], [Erase ] for deletion. [Erase ●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in step 2. ●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 119). 2 Choose a selection method. zzChoose a menu item and an option as desired (= 30). zzTo return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ Choosing Images Individually 1 Choose [Select]. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 116), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzOnce you choose an image following step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually” (= 114), [ ] is displayed. zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. zzRepeat this process to specify other images. 116 3 Erase the image. zzPress the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Rotating Images Before Use Still Images Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Choose [Rotate]. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes ] 4 P Mode zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you press the [ ] button. 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzTo return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix zzPress the [ [Rotate] on the [ Selecting a Range Movies Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. ] button and choose ] tab (= 30). 1 Choose [Select Range]. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 116), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose images. zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 115) to specify images. 3 Erase the images. zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Rotate the image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. ●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 118). Specifying All Images at Once 1 Choose [Select All Images]. zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 116), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate ] to return to the menu screen. images or touch [ Index 2 Erase the images. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 117 Deactivating Auto Rotation Tagging Images as Favorites Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates images based on the current camera orientation. zzPress the [ Rotate] on the [ [Off] (= 30). ] button, choose [Auto ] tab, and then choose ●● Images cannot be rotated (= 117) when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation. ●● In Smart Shuffle (= 113) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. Before Use Still Images Movies You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● “Viewing” (= 103), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 112), “Protecting Images” (= 114), “Erasing Images” (= 116), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 169), “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 171) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzTo untag the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 8 Setting Menu zzRepeat this process to choose additional images. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Choose [Favorites]. zzPress the [ ] button and choose [Favorites] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. 3 Finish the setup process. zzPress the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. Index zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 118 ●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. Convenient Control: Touch Actions Before Use Still Images Movies You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display. ●● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7. (Does not apply to movies or RAW images.) Basic Guide Advanced Guide Using Touch Actions Functions zzDrag across the screen as shown. ●● You can also select or clear current images by touching the screen in step 2. ●● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions (= 119). zzThe function assigned to [ activated. ] is now zzSimilarly, you can also activate functions assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by dragging across the screen. zzCustomize functions assigned to Touch Actions as desired. Changing Touch Actions Functions Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging patterns to them as desired. 1 Access the setting screen. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ tab (= 30). ] 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 119 2 Assign a function to a Touch Action. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a dragging pattern, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the function to assign. Assignable Functions Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image. Next Favorite Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a favorite. Previous Favorite Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as a favorite. Next Date Switch to displaying the first image with the next shooting date. Previous Date Switch to displaying the first image with the previous shooting date. Smart Shuffle Start Smart Shuffle playback. To Camera To Smartphone To Computer To Printer Access the Wi-Fi connection screen. For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions” (= 127). To Web Service Slideshow Start a slideshow. Erase Erase an image. Protect Protect an image or cancel protection. Rotate Rotate an image. Editing Still Images Before Use Basic Guide ●● Image editing (= 120 – = 123) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space. Advanced Guide ●● You can access editing screens for various functions by touching an image after choosing the function in the menu. ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch ●● When [ ] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer. [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch ●● When [ ] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer. [ Resizing Images Still Images Movies Save a copy of images at a lower resolution. 1 Choose [Resize]. zzPress the [ ] button and choose [Resize] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an image size. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the size, and then press the [ ] button. zz[Save new image?] is displayed. 120 4 Save the new image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Cropping Before Use Still Images zzThe image is now saved as a new file. 1 Choose [Cropping]. 5 Review the new image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. zzThe saved image is now displayed. ●● You can also configure this setting by touching the size on the screen in step 3, touching it again, and then touching [OK]. ●● You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen in step 5. Advanced Guide 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution. Basic Guide zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab (= 30). zzPress the [ ] button. [Display new image?] is displayed. ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (= 49). ●● RAW images cannot be edited. Movies You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. (1) (2) (3) 3 Adjust the cropping area. zzA frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped (1). zzThe original image is shown in the upper left, and a preview of the image as cropped (2) is shown in the lower right. You can also see the resolution after cropping (3). zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom lever. zzTo move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. zzTo change the frame orientation, press the [ ] button. zzFaces detected in the image are enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left image. To crop the image based on this frame, turn the [ ] dial to switch to the other frame. zzPress the [ 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] button. 121 4 Save as a new image and review. zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 120). 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (= 49) or resized to [ ] (= 120). ●● RAW images cannot be edited. 3 Choose an option. ●● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. ●● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images. ●● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 44), only the names of the people left in the cropped image will remain. 4 Save as a new image and review. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To move the frame, drag either image on the screen in step 3. ●● You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (= 112) on the screen in step 3. zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 120). ●● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color. ●● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited. ●● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (= 80). Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Before Use Movies You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 80). 1 Choose [My Colors]. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab (= 30). ●● You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 122 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Movies Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file. 1 Choose [i-Contrast]. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 120). ●● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. ●● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. ●● RAW images cannot be edited this way. Before Use ●● You can also configure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3. Basic Guide Correcting Red-Eye Advanced Guide Still Images Movies Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file. 1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ tab (= 30). ] 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. ] 3 Correct the image. zzPress the [ ] button. zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas. zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (= 112). 4 Save as a new image and review. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzThe image is now saved as a new file. ●● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using [Low], [Medium], or [High]. zzFollow step 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 120). 123 ●● Some images may not be corrected accurately. ●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. ●● Protected images cannot be overwritten. ●● RAW images cannot be edited this way. ●● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but the original image cannot be overwritten. Editing Movies Before Use Still Images Movies You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end (excluding digest movies (= 36)). 1 Choose [ Advanced Guide ]. zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” (= 103), choose [ ] and press the [ button. ●● You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the screen in step 4. Basic Guide ] zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed. (1) 2 Specify portions to cut. zz(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is the editing bar. zzPress the [ or [ ]. (2) ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] zzTo view the portions you can cut (identified by [ ] on the screen), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of the movie by choosing [ ]. zzIf you move [ ] to a position other than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 124 3 Review the edited movie. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. The edited movie is now played. zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2. ] zzTo cancel editing, press the [ button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 4 Save the edited movie. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe movie is now saved as a new file. ●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. ●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be available. ●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress. ●● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 159). Reducing File Sizes Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows. zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format. ] movies cannot be compressed. ●● [ ●● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose [Overwrite]. ●● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or editing bar. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 125 Editing Digest Movies Before Use Still Images Movies Individual chapters (clips) (= 36) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Select the clip to erase. zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)” (= 106) to play a movie created in [ ] mode, and then press the [ ] button to access the movie control panel. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe selected clip is played back repeatedly. 3 Confirm erasure. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is overwritten. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer. 126 7 Wi-Fi Functions Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web services Available Wi-Fi Features Before Use You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi. Basic Guide ●● Smartphones and Tablets Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”. Advanced Guide ●● Computer Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via Wi-Fi. ●● Web Services Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. ●● Printers Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting DPS over IP) to print them. ●● Another Camera Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 127 Sending Images to a Smartphone Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these ways. ●● Connect to a device assigned to the [ ] button (= 128) Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies importing images from a smartphone (= 128). Note that only one smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button. ●● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (= 130) You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added. Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated CameraWindow app on the smartphone. For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon website. ●● No matter how you connect the devices, you can also use the smartphone to geotag (= 147) camera images and shoot remotely (= 148). Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ] button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for viewing and saving camera images on connected devices. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 132). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Install CameraWindow. zzFor an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later), activating NFC and touching the smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the smartphone. Once the CameraWindow download page is displayed, download and install the app. zzFor other Android smartphones, find CameraWindow in Google Play and download and install the app. zzFor an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find CameraWindow in the App Store and download and install the app. 2 Press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ] button. zzWhen the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname (= 32). On the [Device Nickname] screen, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 128 3 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed. 6 Choose a smartphone to connect to. zzChoose the smartphone (either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzAfter a connection is established with the smartphone, the smartphone name is displayed on the camera. (This screen will close in about one minute.) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzUse the smartphone to import images from the camera to the smartphone. 3 Other Shooting Modes zzUse the smartphone to end the connection; the camera will automatically turn off. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 7 Import images. 4 Connect the smartphone to the network. zzIn the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. 5 Start CameraWindow. zzFor an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later), activating NFC and touching the smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark ( ) will start CameraWindow on the smartphone. zzFor other smartphones, start CameraWindow on the smartphone. zzAfter the camera recognizes the smartphone, a device selection screen is displayed. ●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind. -- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This may damage the devices. -- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices together in slightly different positions. -- Do not place other objects between the camera and smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or similar accessories may block communication. Index 129 ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different nickname. ●● For better security, you can display a password on the screen in step 3 by accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password displayed on the camera. ●● One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign a different one, first clear the current one in MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button]. ●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 132). 1 Install CameraWindow. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzFollow step 1 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 128) to install CameraWindow on a smartphone. 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzPress the [ on. zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera ] button. zzIf a screen requesting the device nickname is displayed, enter the nickname (= 128). 3 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose [Add a Device]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 130 zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed. zzChoose a smartphone to connect to, as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 128). ●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 5. ●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera (= 149). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 5 Adjust the privacy setting. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. zzYou can now use the smartphone to browse, import, or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely. 6 Send images. zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. zzImage transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. zzTo cancel the connection, press the [ ] button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection. zzTo add multiple smartphones, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1. ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 144). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 131 Using Another Access Point When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point. 1 Prepare for the connection. zzAccess the [Waiting to connect] screen. Either follow steps 1 – 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 128) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 130). 2 Connect the smartphone to the access point. 5 Configure the privacy settings and send images. zzFollow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 130) to configure the privacy settings and send images. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Previous Access Points To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 128) or step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 130). ●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Camera Access Point Mode]. ●● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 132). 3 Choose [Switch Network]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Switch Network], and then press the [ ] button. ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 132) from step 4. zzA list of detected access points will be displayed. 4 Connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. zzFor WPS-compatible access points, connect to the access point and choose the smartphone as described in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzFor non-WPS access points, follow steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 137) to connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. 132 Saving Images to a Computer Installing the Software Before Use Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. Preparing to Register a Computer Checking Your Computer Environment The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. What you will need: Advanced Guide ●● Computer ●● USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)* * A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a cable, some features will not be added. 1 Download the software. ●● Windows 7 SP1 zzWith a computer connected to the Internet, access http://www.canon.com/ icpd/. ●● Mac OS X 10.9 zzAccess the site for your country or region. ●● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later zzDownload the software. ●● Windows 8/8.1 ●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported. ●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version) require a separate download and installation of Windows Media Feature Pack. For details, check the following website. http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730 Basic Guide 2 Begin the installation. zzClick [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. 3 When a message is displayed prompting you to connect the camera, choose whether to connect or not. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 133 When Connecting the Camera to the Computer (2) (1) zzWith the camera turned off, open the cover (1). With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal (2). zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. zzTurn the camera on, and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. Without Connecting the Camera zzSelect [Install without connecting the device] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. 4 Install the files. zzInstallation may take some time, depending on computer performance and the Internet connection. zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. zzAfter installation when the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off before disconnecting the cable. ●● Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to its latest version of the software. Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only) On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly. 1 Confirm that the computer is Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide connected to an access point. zzFor instructions on checking your network connection, refer to the computer user manual. 2 Configure the setting. zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection setup]. zzIn the application that opens, follow the on-screen instructions and configure the setting. ●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step 2. -- Turn on media streaming. This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi. -- Turn on network discovery. This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera. -- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). This allows you to check the network connection status. -- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP). This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically. ●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here. Check the settings of your security software. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 134 Saving Images to a Connected Computer Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows. Also refer to the access point user manual. Confirming Access Point Compatibility Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi standards in “Wi-Fi” (= 194). Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 135) or not (= 137). For non-WPS access points, check the following information. ●● Network name (SSID/ESSID) The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the “access point name” or “network name”. ●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method / encryption mode) The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system authentication), or no security. ●● Password (encryption key / network key) The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”. ●● Key index (transmit key) The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data encryption. Use “1” as the setting. ●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings, contact the system administrator for details. ●● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings. ●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on checking settings, refer to the access point user manual. ●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”. ●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”. ●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Using WPS-Compatible Access Points WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for settings on a WPS supported device. 1 Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point. zzFor instructions on checking the connection, refer to the device and access point user manuals. 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzPress the [ on. zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera ] button. zzWhen the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname (= 32). On the [Device Nickname] screen, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 135 3 Choose [ 8 Choose the target device. ]. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose the target device name (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Choose [Add a Device]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. 5 Choose [WPS Connection]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [WPS Connection], and then press the [ ] button. 6 Choose [PBC Method]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [PBC Method], and then press the [ ] button. 7 Establish the connection. zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS connection button for a few seconds. zzOn the camera, press the [ go to the next step. ] button to 9 Install a driver (first Windows connection only). zzWhen this screen is displayed on the camera, click the Start menu on the computer, click [Control Panel], and then click [Add a device]. zzDouble-click the connected camera icon. zzDriver installation will begin. zzAfter driver installation is complete, and the camera and computer connection is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be displayed. Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen. 10 Display CameraWindow. zzWindows: Access CameraWindow by clicking [Downloads Images From Canon Camera]. zzMac OS: CameraWindow is automatically displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is established between the camera and computer. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzThe camera connects to the access point and lists devices connected to it on the [Select a Device] screen. 136 11 Import images. zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. zzImages are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed after image import is complete. For instructions on viewing images on a computer, refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163). ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different nickname. ●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen is blank. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera. ●● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included with your access point. Connecting to Listed Access Points 1 View the listed access points. zzView the listed networks (access points) as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Choose an access point. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a network (access point), and then press the [ ] button. 3 Enter the access point password. zzPress the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter the password (= 32). zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Next], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose [Auto]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Auto], and then press the [ ] button. zzTo save images to a connected computer, follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 137 ●● To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or refer to the user manual. ●● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password. ●● When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press the [ ] button. Previous Access Points You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135). ●● To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135). ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed after connection, and then either follow the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135) from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 137) from step 2. Sending Images to a Registered Web Service Registering Web Services Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you want to use. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services. ●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and version information. ●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon. com/cig/). ●● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you want to register. ●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 138 Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. 1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and access the camera web link settings page. zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. zzOnce the login screen is displayed, enter your user name and password to log in. If you do not have a CANON iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow the instructions to complete member registration (free of charge). 2 Choose the type of camera. zzOn this camera model, [ ] is displayed in the Wi-Fi menu. ], a page is zzOnce you choose [ displayed for entering the authentication code. On this page in step 7, you will enter the authentication code displayed on the camera after steps 3 – 6. 4 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 5 Choose [Authenticate]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Authenticate], and then press the [ ] button. 6 Establish a connection with an access point. zzConnect to the access point as described in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 135) or in steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 137). zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, an authentication code is displayed. 3 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzPress the [ on. zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera ] button. zzWhen the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname (= 32). On the [Device Nickname] screen, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 7 Enter the authentication code. zzOn the smartphone or computer, enter the authentication code displayed on the camera and go to the next step. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzA six-digit confirmation number is displayed. 139 8 Check the confirmation numbers and complete the setup process. zzMake sure the confirmation number on the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. zzComplete the setup process on the smartphone or computer. zz[ ] (= 145) and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY are now added as destinations, and the [ ] icon changes to [ ]. zzA message is displayed on the smartphone or computer to indicate that this process is finished. To add other Web services, follow the procedure in “Registering Other Web Services” (= 140) from step 2. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and choose a device. Registering Other Web Services Before Use You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the camera first (= 139). 1 Access the Web service settings Basic Guide Advanced Guide screen. zzFollow step 1 in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 139) to log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then access the Web service settings screen. 2 Configure the Web service you want to use. zzFollow the instructions displayed on the smartphone or computer to set up the Web service. 3 Choose [ ]. zzIn Playback mode, press the [ to access the Wi-Fi menu. ] button 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 8 Setting Menu zzThe Web service settings are now updated. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the camera settings. Index 140 Uploading Images to Web Services 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzPress the [ on. zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or add comments before sending (= 144). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] button. 2 Choose the destination. zzChoose the icon of the Web service for sharing (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. zzIf multiple recipients or sharing options are used with a Web service, choose the desired item on the [Select Recipient] screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 3 Send images. zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the terms of service, choose [I Agree], and press the [ ] button. zzImage transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzAfter the images are sent, [OK] is displayed. Press the [ ] button to return to the playback screen. 141 Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 132). 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzAccess the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 130). 2 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose [Add a Device]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed. 4 Connect the printer to the network. 5 Choose the printer. Before Use zzChoose the printer name (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 6 Choose an image to print. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. zzPress the [ ] ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. zzFor detailed printing instructions, see “Printing Images” (= 166). zzTo cancel the connection, press the [ ] button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 132). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzIn the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. 142 Sending Images to Another Camera Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows. ●● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support EyeFi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera. 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zzAccess the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 130). 2 Choose [ ]. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose [Add a Device]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera too. zzCamera connection information will be added when [Start connection on target camera] is displayed on both camera screens. 4 Send images. zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzImage transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. zzTo cancel the connection, press the ] button, choose [OK] on the [ confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 144). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 143 Image Sending Options Notes on Sending Images You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to annotate the images you send. ●● Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (= 4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers. Sending Multiple Images 1 Choose [Select and send]. zzOn the image transfer screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose images. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. zzRepeat this process to choose additional images. zzAfter you finish choosing images, press ] button. the [ ●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to five minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However, Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using. ●● For movies that you do not compress (= 125), a separate, compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough space for it on the memory card. ●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. ●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons. [ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak ●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. 3 Send the images. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. 144 Choosing the Image Resolution (Size) On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose the resolution by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option. ●● Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size before sending. ●● Movies cannot be resized. ●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 30) ► [ ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending]. ] tab Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) Before Use Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services. Basic Guide Initial Preparations 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu (only when sending movies with images). 9 Accessories zzPress the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 10 Appendix Preparing the Camera Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button, so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. 1 Add [ Adding Comments Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service. 1 Access the screen for adding comments. zzOn the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Add a comment (= 32). 3 Send the image. ●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent. ●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The same comment is added to all images sent together. Advanced Guide ] as a destination. zzAdd [ ] as a destination, as described in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 139). zzTo choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering Other Web Services” (= 140) to update the camera settings. 2 Choose the type of images to send zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Stills/Movies]. Index 145 3 Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only when sending images by pressing the [ ] button). zzClear the [ ] button setting if a smartphone is already assigned to the button (= 128). zzPress the [ ] button to access the mobile connection screen, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Preparing the Computer Install and configure the software on the destination computer. 1 Install the software. 2 Register the camera. zzMac OS: In the menu bar, click [ then click [Add new camera]. Before Use Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer. If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and save the images. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics zzIf you have already assigned [ ] to the [ ] button, press the [ ] button. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzIf you have not assigned the button this way, choose [ ] as described in steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web Services” (= 141). 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 1 Send images. zzOnce the connection is established, the images are sent. When the images have been sent successfully to the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on the screen. zzInstall the software on a computer connected to the Internet (= 133). zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ and then click [Add new camera]. Sending Images ], 2 Save the images to the computer. 7 Wi-Fi Functions ], and zzImages are automatically saved to the computer when you turn it on. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix zzA list of cameras linked to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose the camera from which images are to be sent. zzOnce the camera is registered and the computer is ready to receive images, the icon changes to [ ]. zzImages are automatically sent to Web services from the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, even if the computer is off. ●● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 159). Index 146 ●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer. ●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet. Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app CameraWindow. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone ●● Geotag images on the camera (= 147) ●● Shoot remotely (= 148) ●● In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view camera images (= 128, = 130, = 149). Geotagging Images on the Camera GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation. ●● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (= 152) to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones. ●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing these images with others, as when posting images online where many others can view them. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 147 Shooting Remotely As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to shoot remotely. 1 Secure the camera. zzOnce remote shooting begins, the camera lens will come out. Lens motion from zooming may also move the camera out of position. Keep the camera still by mounting it on a tripod or taking other measures. ●● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However, some FUNC. and MENU settings you have configured in advance may be changed automatically. ●● Movie shooting is not available. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzIn CameraWindow on the smartphone, choose remote shooting. 6 Playback Mode zzThe camera lens will come out. Do not press near the lens, and make sure no objects will obstruct it. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 2 Connect the camera and ●● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the connection environment will not affect recorded images. ●● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the focus. ●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the smartphone to browse and import images from the camera. smartphone (= 128, = 130). zzIn the privacy settings, choose [Yes]. 3 Choose remote shooting. zzOnce the camera is ready for remote shooting, a live image from the camera will be displayed on the smartphone. zzAt this time, a message is displayed on the camera, and all operations except pressing the power button are disabled. 4 Shoot. Index zzUse the smartphone to shoot. 148 Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows. Editing Connection Information 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose the device to edit. zzPress the [ ] button to turn the camera on. zzPress the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the icon of the device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose [Edit a Device]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose a device to edit. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose an item to edit. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item to edit, and then press the [ ] button. zzThe items you can change depend on what device or service the camera will access. Before Use Connection Configurable Items Web Services [Change Device Nickname] (= 149) O O O O – [View Settings] (= 130) – O – – – [Erase Connection Info] (= 149) O O O O – O : Configurable Basic Guide Advanced Guide – : Not configurable Changing a Device Nickname You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on the camera. zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 149), choose [Change Device Nickname] and press the [ ] button. zzSelect the input field and press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname (= 32). Erasing Connection Information Erase connection information (information about devices that you have connected to) as follows. zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 149), choose [Erase Connection Info] and press the [ ] button. zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzThe connection information will be erased. 149 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera to another person, or dispose of it. Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. zzPress the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 30). 2 Choose [Reset Settings]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Restore the default settings. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zzThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] on the [ ] tab (= 157). Index 150 8 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Before Use MENU (= 30) functions on the [ ] tab can be configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Silencing Camera Operations Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. zzChoose [Mute], and then choose [On]. Setting Menu Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience ●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button as you turn the camera on. ●● Sound is not played during movies (= 103) if you mute camera sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down. Adjusting the Volume Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. zzChoose [Volume], and then press the [ button. zzChoose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume. ] 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 151 Customizing Sounds World Clock Customize camera operating sounds as follows. zzChoose [Sound Options], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. Before Use To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Specify your destination. ●● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ (= 36) cannot be changed. ] mode Hiding Hints and Tips Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 29) or MENU (= 30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. zzChoose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off]. zzChoose [Time Zone], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the destination. zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. zzPress the [ ] button. 2 Switch to the destination time zone. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows. zzChoose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then adjust the setting, either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 179). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 21) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date. 152 Lens Retraction Timing The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the [ ] button in Shooting mode (= 26). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.]. Power-Saving Adjustment Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 27). zzChoose [Power Saving], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose [Lens Retraction], and then choose [0 sec.]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzAfter choosing an item, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust it as needed. ●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. Using Eco Mode This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Configure the setting. zzChoose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On]. ] is now shown on the shooting zz[ screen (= 179). zzThe screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity. 2 Shoot. zzTo activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway. ●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. ●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode (= 153) to [On]. Screen Brightness Adjust screen brightness as follows. zzChoose [LCD Brightness], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the brightness. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the camera. 153 Start-Up Screen Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows. zzChoose [Start-up Image], and then press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an option. ●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. ] Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity. Formatting Memory Cards Low-Level Formatting Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera. Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. 1 Access the [Format] screen. zzChoose [Format], and then press the [ button. 2 Choose [OK]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 3 Format the memory card. zzTo begin the formatting process, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory card formatting complete] is displayed. Press the [ ] button. ] Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 154), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Low Level Format], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is displayed. zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 154) to continue with the formatting process. ●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 154), because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. ●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 154 File Numbering Metric / Non-Metric Display Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers. zzChoose [File Numbering], and then choose an option. Continuous Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards. Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created. ●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted (= 154)) memory card. ●● Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163) for information on the card folder structure and image formats. Date-Based Image Storage Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. zzChoose [Create Folder], and then choose [Daily]. zzImages will now be saved in folders created on the shooting date. Before Use Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 34), the MF indicator (= 81), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed. Basic Guide zzChoose [Units], and then choose [ft/in]. Advanced Guide Electronic Level Calibration Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera. For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (= 99) to help you level the camera in advance. 1 Make sure the camera is level. zzPlace the camera on a flat surface, such as a table. 2 Calibrate the electronic level. zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press the [ ] button. zzTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/ backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. zzChoose [OK], and then press the [ button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ] 155 Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images Resetting the Electronic Level Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level. zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press the [ ] button. zzChoose [Reset], and then press the [ button. zzChoose [OK], and then press the [ button. ] ] Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch operations. zzChoose [Touch Operation], and then choose [Off]. Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera responds to a lighter touch. zzChoose [Touch Response], and then choose [High]. To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this information beforehand as follows. zzChoose [Copyright Info], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and enter the name (= 32). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. When [Accept zzPress the [ changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix zzThe information set here will now be recorded in images. ●● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also use the software (= 163) to enter, change, and delete copyright information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images. ●● You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software, once you save the images to a computer. Deleting All Copyright Information You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same time as follows. Index zzFollow the steps in “Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images” (= 156) and choose [Delete Copyright Info]. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 156 ●● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted. Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ Before Use ] tab. ●● [Video System] (= 162) Checking Certification Logos ●● [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 127) Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body. zzChoose [Certification Logo Display], and then press the [ ] button. ●● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (= 128) Basic Guide Advanced Guide Restoring Defaults If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings. 1 Access the [Reset All] screen. zzChoose [Reset All], and then press the [ ] button. Display Language 2 Restore default settings. Change the display language as needed. zzChoose [Language the [ ] button. ], and then press zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing ] button. the [ zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. zzDefault settings are now restored. ●● The following functions are not restored to default settings. -- Information registered using Face ID (= 44) -- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 152), [Time Zone] (= 152), ] (= 157), and [Video System] (= 162) [Language -- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 79) -- Shooting mode chosen in [ ] (= 55) and [ ] (= 58) modes -- Values set using the exposure compensation dial (= 74) -- Movie mode (= 71) -- Wi-Fi settings (= 127) -- Calibrated value for the electronic level (= 155) -- Copyright information (= 156) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 157 9 System Map Basic Guide Included Accessories Wrist Strap Battery Pack NB-13L*1 Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1 Advanced Guide USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2 Accessories Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon Memory Card accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately Before Use Card Reader Computer PictBridge-Compatible Printers Power HDMI Cable (camera end: Type D)*3 Cables AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 Flash Unit Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST TV/Video System Cases 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index High-Power Flash HF-DC2 Waterproof Case WP-DC54 *1 Also available for purchase separately. *2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU). *3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.). 158 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. Optional Accessories Before Use The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Power Supplies Battery Pack NB-13L zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-13L ●● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs. ●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 159 Other Accessories AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 zzFor powering the camera using household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera. Before Use Waterproof Case WP-DC54 zzFor underwater photography at depths of up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on ski slopes. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Interface Cable IFC-400PCU ●● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). ●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. zzFor connecting the camera to a computer or printer. Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST Flash Unit zzConnect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen. High-Power Flash HF-DC2 zzExternal flash for illuminating subjects that are out of range of the built-in flash. ●● High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [ ], or [ shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual]. ] Printers Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers zzEven without using a computer, you can print images by connecting the camera directly to a printer. For details, visit your nearest Canon retailer. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 160 Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. Playback on a TV Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Still Images Movies By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 180). 3 Turn the TV on and switch to video input. zzSwitch the TV input to the video input you connected the cable to in step 2. 4 Turn the camera on. zzPress the [ Playback on a High-Definition TV Still Images Movies You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at a resolution of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high definition. 1 Make sure the camera and TV are off. 2 Connect the camera to the TV. zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into the HDMI input as shown. ] button to turn the camera on. zzImages from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and TV before disconnecting the cable. ●● It is not possible to connect the USB cable or an optional stereo AV cable at the same time as an HDMI cable. Forcing the cables into the camera at the same time may damage the camera or cables. ●● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a television. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an HDTV. 161 Playback on a Standard-Definition TV Still Images ●● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (= 51), MF-Point Zoom (= 81), MF Peaking (= 82) and Night Display (= 92) are not available. Movies Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera. 1 Make sure the camera and TV are off. 2 Connect the camera to the TV. zzOn the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the video inputs as shown. zzMake sure the cable plugs are in video inputs of the same color. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Powering the Camera with Household Power Still Images Movies Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. (2) (1) 1 Make sure the camera is off. 2 Open the cover. zzFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 19) to open the memory card/battery cover, and then open the coupler cable port cover as shown. 3 3 Display images. zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a High-Definition TV” (= 161) to display images. (1) ●● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the ] button and choose video output format, press the [ [Video System] on the [ ] tab. ●● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a television. Insert the coupler. zzHolding the coupler with the terminals (1) facing as shown, insert the coupler just as you would a battery pack (following step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 19)). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzMake sure the coupler cable passes through the port (1). (1) 162 4 Close the cover. zzLower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide the switch, until it clicks into the closed position (2). (2) (1) Using the Software Before Use The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer. Basic Guide Software 5 Connect the power cord. zzInsert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet. zzTurn the camera on and use it as desired. zzWhen finished, turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet. ●● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. ●● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. Advanced Guide After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you can do the following things on your computer. ●● CameraWindow -- Import images and change camera settings ●● ImageBrowser EX -- Manage images: view, search, and organize -- Print and edit images ●● Digital Photo Professional -- Browse, process and edit RAW images ●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately. Software Instruction Manual Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 163 Computer Connections via a Cable Saving Images to a Computer Checking Your Computer Environment The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. Operating System* Windows Windows 8/8.1 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some software excluded). * When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (= 133). ●● Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including supported OS versions. Installing the Software For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (= 133). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Connect the camera to the computer. (2) Mac OS Mac OS X 10.9 Mac OS X 10.8 Before Use (1) zzWith the camera turned off, open the cover (1). With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal (2). zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. 2 Turn the camera on to access CameraWindow. zzPress the [ on. ] button to turn the camera zzMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer. zzWindows: Follow the steps introduced below. zzIn the screen that displays, click the [ link to modify the program. ] 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 164 zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon Camera] and then click [OK]. zzDouble-click [ ]. 3 Save the images to the computer. zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. zzImages are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. zzAfter images are saved, close ] button to CameraWindow, press the [ turn the camera off, and unplug the cable. ●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply. -- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. -- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. -- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be saved. -- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. -- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes. -- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as movie editing. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzFor instructions on viewing images on a computer, refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 165 4 Turn the camera on. Printing Images Still Images Movies Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. Easy Print zzPress the [ on. Before Use ] button to turn the camera Basic Guide 5 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Advanced Guide ] 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode zzPrinting now begins. 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode zzTo print other images, repeat the above procedures starting from step 5 after printing is finished. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 6 Access the printing screen. zzPress the [ ] button. 7 Print the image. Still Images Movies Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridgecompatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable. 1 Make sure the camera and printer are off. 2 Connect the camera to the printer. zzOpen the terminal cover. Holding the smaller cable plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal. zzConnect the larger cable plug to the printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the camera and printer off and disconnect the cable. ●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see “Printers” (= 160). ●● RAW images cannot be printed. Index 3 Turn the printer on. 166 Configuring Print Settings Cropping Images before Printing Still Images Movies 1 Access the printing screen. zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 166) to access this screen. 2 Configure the settings. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then choose an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Default Date File No. Both Off Default Matches current printer settings. Prints images with the date added. Still Images Movies By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image. 1 Choose [Cropping]. Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode zzA cropping frame is now displayed, indicating the image area to print. 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed. zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom lever. zzTo move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. – zzTo rotate the frame, turn the [ Matches current printer settings. zzWhen finished, press the [ On Uses information from the time of shooting to print under optimal settings. Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye. Choose the number of copies to print. Cropping – Specify a desired image area to print (= 167). Paper Settings – Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (= 168). Advanced Guide 1 Prints images with both the date and file number added. – Basic Guide zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 167) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the [ ] button. Prints images with the file number added. Off No. of Copies Before Use ] dial. ] button. 3 Print the image. zzFollow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 166) to print. ●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. Index 167 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing Still Images Available Layout Options Movies 1 Choose [Paper Settings]. zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 167) to access the printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a paper size. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Default Matches current printer settings. Bordered Prints with blank space around the image. Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet. ID Photo Prints images for identification purposes. Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 3:2. Fixed Size Choose the print size. Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. length. ] zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of images per sheet. 5 ] button. Print the image. zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing” (= 168), choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose the long and short side 4 Choose a layout. zzPress the [ Movies 1 Choose [ID Photo]. Choose a type of paper. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an option. Advanced Guide Printing ID Photos Still Images 3 Basic Guide zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose the printing area. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before Printing” (= 167) to choose the printing area. 4 Print the image. 168 Printing Movie Scenes Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies 1 Access the printing screen. zzFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print” (= 166) to choose a movie, and then press the [ ] button. Still Images zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing method. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● RAW images cannot be included in print list. Configuring Print Settings Still Images Movies Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list. zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab. Choose and configure items as desired (= 30). 3 Print the image. Movie Printing Options Single Movies Batch printing (= 171) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. This screen is displayed. 2 Choose a printing method. Before Use Prints the current scene as a still image. Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file Sequence number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. ●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models. Standard Print Type Date File No. Clear DPOF data One image is printed per sheet. Index Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet. Both Both standard and index formats are printed. On Images are printed with the shooting date. Off – On Images are printed with the file number. Off – On All image print list settings are cleared after printing. Off – 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 169 ●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. ●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File No.] at the same time. ●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately). ●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/ Time] on the [ ] tab (= 20). 3 Specify the number of prints. zzTo set up printing for other images and specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 – 3. Still Images 1 Movies Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. zzYou can now specify the number of copies. zzIf you specify index printing for the image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2. zzWhen finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. ] button Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images Still Images Setting Up Printing for Individual Images Before Use zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to specify the number of prints (up to 99). Movies zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 170), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 115) to specify images. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Order], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Up Printing for All Images Still Images Movies zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 170), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 170 Adding Images to a Photobook Clearing All Images from the Print List zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 170), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies zzWhen images have been added to the print list (= 169 – = 170), this screen is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the [ ] button to print the images in the print list. zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image. Before Use Still Images Movies Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Choosing a Selection Method zzPress the [ ] button, choose [Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and then choose how you will select images. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. ●● After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163) and the printer manual for further information. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 171 Adding Images Individually Removing All Images from a Photobook Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Select]. zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 171), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 2 Before Use Still Images Movies zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 171), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Choose an image. zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. zz[ ] is displayed. zzTo remove the image from the photobook, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. zzRepeat this process to specify other images. zzWhen finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. ] button Adding All Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 171), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 172 10 Appendix Helpful information when using the camera Troubleshooting Before Use If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Power 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions ●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 19). 8 Setting Menu The battery pack is swollen. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. ●● ●● ●● ●● Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 19). Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 19). Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 19). Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. The battery pack runs out of power quickly. ●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects. ●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. ●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack. The lens is not retracted. ●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Display on a TV Index Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 161). 173 Shooting No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Before Use Cannot shoot. ●● In Playback mode (= 103), press the shutter button halfway (= 27). ●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. Basic Guide Strange display on the screen under low light (= 29). Subjects in shots look too dark. Advanced Guide Strange display on the screen when shooting. ●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies. -- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting. Full-screen display is not available while shooting (= 49). No date stamp is added to images. ●● Although date stamps cannot be added to images with this camera, images can be printed with the date as follows. -- Use the software to print For details, see “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163). -- Print using printer functions [ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is not possible (= 37). [ ●● ●● ●● ●● ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 37). Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 91). Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 88). Increase the ISO speed (= 75). Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). Shots are out of focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot (= 27). ●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 196). ●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 52). ●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. ●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 83, = 87). Shots are blurry. ●● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting. ●● ●● ●● ●● Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 88). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 74). Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 77, = 123). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 74, = 74). Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● ●● ●● ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 34). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 74). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 74, = 74). Reduce the lighting on subjects. Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 37). ●● Shoot within flash range (= 196). ●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (= 89, = 95). ●● Increase the ISO speed (= 75). Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● Shoot within flash range (= 196). ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 34). ●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (= 89, = 95). White spots appear in flash shots. ●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. Shots look grainy. ●● Lower the ISO speed (= 75). ●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 55). Subjects are affected by red-eye. ●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 52). The red-eye reduction lamp (= 4) will be activated in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. ●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 123). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 174 Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower. ●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 154). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. Playback Playback is not possible. ●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 181 – = 186). ●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 163) for details on folder structure and file names. The Babies or Children icon does not display. Playback stops, or audio skips. ●● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face information (= 44). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday, re-register face information (= 44), or make sure that the date/time are set correctly (= 152). Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work. ●● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen. Touch closer to the center of the screen. Shooting Movies The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. ●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 154, = 196). [ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically. ●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. -- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 154). -- Lower the image quality (= 50). -- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 196). Zooming is not possible. ●● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (= 66). ●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ Subjects look distorted. ] mode (= 60). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (= 154). ●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds. ●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate. Sound is not played during movies. ●● Adjust the volume (= 151) if you have activated [Mute] (= 151) or the sound in the movie is faint. ●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 60) or [ ] (= 69) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes. Memory Card The memory card is not recognized. ●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 26). Computer Cannot transfer images to a computer. ●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows. ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button -- Press the [ down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a malfunction. 175 Cannot resize images for sending. Wi-Fi Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button. ●● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try again. ●● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback. ●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer, computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable. Cannot add a device/destination. ●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/destinations (= 149). ●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 138). ●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your smartphone (= 128). ●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer. Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 133, = 135). ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. ●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size. ●● Movies cannot be resized. Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted. ●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [ ] to reduce sending time (= 145). ●● Movies may take a long time to send. ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 ] is GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ displayed. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else. ●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 150). Cannot connect to the access point. ●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera (= 194). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a supported channel manually. Cannot send images. ●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on the destination device and resend the images. ●● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position. ●● RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent. However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync. ●● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent using Image Sync via an access point (= 145). Before moving or renaming these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 176 On-Screen Messages If an error message is displayed, respond as follows. Capture or Playback No memory card Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back MOV/Cannot play back MP4 ●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. ●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/ Unselectable image./No identification information ●● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (= 19). ●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies. Edit ID Info* (= 111), Magnify* (= 112), Smart Shuffle* (= 113), Rotate* (= 117), Favorites (= 118), Edit* (= 120), Print List* (= 169), and Photobook Set-up* (= 171). Cannot record! Invalid selection range Memory card error (= 154) Exceeded selection limit ●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way (= 19). Memory card locked ●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a memory card facing the correct way (= 19). ●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Insufficient space on card ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 34, = 54, = 73, = 93) or edit images (= 120). Either erase unneeded images (= 116) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 19). Touch AF unavailable ●● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (= 181). Touch AF canceled ●● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (= 86). Charge the battery (= 19) No Image. ●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. Protected! (= 114) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 115, = 117, = 170), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. ●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 169) or Photobook Set-up (= 171). Choose 998 images or less. ●● Print List (= 169) or Photobook Set-up (= 171) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. ●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 114), Erase (= 116), Favorites (= 118), Print List (= 169), or Photobook Set-up (= 171). Naming error! ●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 155), or format the memory card (= 154). Lens Error ●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 177 A camera error was detected (error number) ●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. File Error ●● Correct printing (= 166) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is connected to the printer. Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed ●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed. ●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. ●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Sending failed Memory card error 1 Camera Basics ●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Receiving failed Insufficient space on card 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ●● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position. 6 Playback Mode ●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 135). ●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the connection. ●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection. Receiving failed Naming error! 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Cannot determine access point Insufficient space on server 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Print error ●● Check the paper size setting (= 168). If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. Ink absorber full ●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement. Wi-Fi Connection failed ●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try reconnecting again. No access points found ●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on. ●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the correct SSID. ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card with sufficient space. Receiving failed Memory card locked ●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received. ●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space. ●● Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 145) to your computer. Check network settings ●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current network settings. Index Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings ●● Check the access point security settings (= 135). IP address conflict ●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another. 178 On-Screen Information Shooting (Information Display) (11)(12)(13) (14)(15)(16) (17) (30) (31) (32) (18) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (2) Flash mode (= 88) (3) Flash exposure compensation / Flash output level (= 89, = 95) (4) Metering method (= 74), Shadow correction (= 78) (5) ND filter (= 78) (6) Drive mode (= 87), AEB shooting (= 76), Focus bracketing (= 82) (7) White balance (= 78), Mercury lamp correction (= 49) (8) My Colors (= 80) (9) Eco mode (= 153) (32) Camera shake warning (= 37) (23) AE lock (= 74), FE lock (= 89) (25) Electronic level (= 50) (21) (27) Exposure compensation level (= 74) (26) Aperture value (= 94, = 94) (22) Shooting mode (= 181), Scene icon (= 38) (22) DR correction (= 77) (19) (20) (36) (37) (29) Grid lines (= 99) (30) Hybrid Auto mode (= 36) (24) Shutter speed (= 93, = 94) (34) (35) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (1) (33) (20) Blink detection (= 51) (21) AF frame (= 83), Spot AE point frame (= 74) (28) (29) (38) (28) ISO speed (= 75) * In [ (31) Touch Shutter (= 42) (33) Zoom bar (= 34) 1 Camera Basics (37) Exposure level (= 94) 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (38) Exposure compensation level (= 74) 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix (36) MF indicator (= 81) ] mode, indicates the number of shots available. Battery Level An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Display Details Sufficient charge Slightly depleted, but sufficient (14) Recordable shots (= 195)* Advanced Guide (35) Image stabilization (= 91) (10) Self-timer (= 41) (13) Still image compression (= 91), Resolution (= 49) Basic Guide (34) Time zone (= 152) (11) IS mode icon (= 39) (12) Battery level (= 179) Before Use (Blinking red) [Charge the battery] Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately (15) Movie quality (= 50) (16) Digital zoom magnification (= 40), Digital tele-converter (= 83) Index (17) Remaining time (= 196) (18) Histogram (= 105) (19) Focusing range (= 81, = 81), AF lock (= 87) 179 Playback (Detailed Information Display) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (30) Compression (image quality) (= 91) / Resolution (= 49, = 50), Digest movies (= 36), RAW (= 90), MP4 (movies) (6)(7)(8)(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (17) (18) (19) (20) (24) (26) (25) (27) (1) Movies (= 34, = 103) (2) Current image no. / Total no. of images (28) (30) (31) (32) (29) (16) ISO speed (= 75) (17) Metering method (= 74) (3) Histogram (= 105) Battery level (= 179) (19) White balance (= 78) (20) White balance correction (= 57), Mercury lamp correction (= 49), Creative Shot effect (= 55) Wi-Fi signal strength (= 144) Image Sync (= 145) (7) Image editing (= 120), Movie compression (= 125) (8) Favorites (= 118) (9) Protection (= 114) (21) My Colors (= 80, = 122) (22) Focusing range (= 81, = 81) (23) ND filter (= 78) (24) Red-eye correction (= 123) (10) Folder number - File number (= 155) (25) High ISO NR (= 76) (11) Shooting date/time (= 20) (26) DR correction (= 77) (12) Shooting mode (= 181) (27) Shadow correction (= 78) (13) Shutter speed (= 93, = 94) (28) Image quality / Frame rate (movies) (= 49, = 50) (14) Aperture value (= 94, = 94) (15) Exposure compensation level (= 74) Basic Guide ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 161). 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Play 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.) 6 Playback Mode Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 126) (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) 7 Wi-Fi Functions Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix (21) (22)(23) (4) (5) (32) File size Before Use Advanced Guide (16) (18) Flash (= 88), Flash exposure compensation (= 89) (6) (31) Still images: Resolution (= 195) Movies: Playback time (= 196) Summary of Movie Control Panel The following operations are available on the movie control panel accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 103). Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed. Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] to ] button.) ] button.) Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 126) (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (= 126)) Edit (= 124) Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer (= 166). Index * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. (29) Group playback (= 110) ●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 180 Functions and Menu Tables Before Use 1 * / / / Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black icons, such as Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons, such as . * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / 3 / / / * / *3 / / / / / / / / / / 1 * / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Av/Tv Settings (= 93, = 94) Aperture Value / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Shutter Speed *1 / / / Flash (= 88) *1 / / / / / Flash Exposure Compensation (= 89) *1 / / / / / / Flash Output Level (= 95) / *2 1 * / / / / / / *1 / / / / / Advanced Guide 1 Drive Mode (= 87) *1 / / / / / . Exposure Compensation (= 74) 1 / / / / / / Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / 1 / / / / / 181 Program Shift (= 74) 1 * / / / / / / / / Before Use / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AE Lock/FE Lock (= 71, = 74, = 89)*4 1 * / / / 5 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (= 99)*6 *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 * / / / / / / *1 / *7 / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / *9 / *9 / *9 / / 9 / / * / / / / / / / / / / / *7 / / / / *8 / *8 / / / / / / Face Select (= 85) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *7 / *7 / / / / 1 / / Touch AF (= 86) Focusing Range (= 57, = 81, = 81) *1 / / / / / Move AF Frame (= 84) ] or movie button) (= 87) AF Lock (when assigned to the [ *1 / / / / / / * / / / AF/MF Switching (during recording) (= 71, = 81, = 96) / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Change Display (= 29) *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. ], AF lock, or [ ]. *2 [ ] is set with [ *3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases. *4 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode. *5 Only with ISO Auto selected. ] is assigned to the [ ] button or movie button (= 99). *6 When [ ] is selected. *7 Only when [ *8 Only available when faces are detected. *9 Only in manual focus mode. / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 182 FUNC. Menu 125 – 12800 *1 / / / DR Correction (= 77) *1 / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ISO Speed (= 75) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / 1 / * / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / White Balance Correction (= 79) AUTO * / / / / / / White Balance (= 78) *1 / / / Shadow Correction (= 78) Before Use *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / / 183 Underwater White Balance Correction (= 57) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Self-Timer (= 41) / / / / / / / / / / / / / Color Adjustment (Biaxial, = 70) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Before Use / / / My Colors (= 80) *1 / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Self-Timer Settings (= 42) *1 / / / / / / / / / 3 1 * / / / / / 3 * / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / 4 / / / / / / / / / / Bracketing (= 76, = 82) Delay*5 *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Shots*6 *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Metering Method (= 74) *1 / / / / / *1 / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / 184 ND Filter (= 78) *1 / / / / / / Resolution (= 49) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 48) *1 / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Before Use / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide / / Advanced Guide / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Compression (= 91) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Movie Quality (= 50) *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Image Type (= 90) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *7 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / / / / *1 / / / / 1 * / / / *1 / / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 185 *1 *2 *3 *4 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. Advanced settings not available. White balance is not available. Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. *5 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. *6 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots. *7 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 61). Shooting Tab / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1.6x/2.0x *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *4 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index On Standard / *1 / / / Continuous AF (= 85) Digital Zoom (= 40) / / / / Off Small *1 / / / / / On Normal *1 / / / / Servo AF (= 85) AF Frame Size (= 84)*3 *1 / / / / / Off 1-point *1 / / / / / / On Face AiAF*2 / *1 / / / Before Use AF-Point Zoom (= 51) AF Frame (= 83) *1 / / / Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 186 Off 4x 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Touch Shutter (= 42) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 2x / / / / / / / / On/Off *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Level Low/High *1 / / / MF-Point Zoom (= 81) *1 / / / / / Peaking Off *1 / / / / MF Peaking Settings (= 82) On *1 / / / / / Off AF-assist Beam (= 52) *1 / / / / / / On Off *1 / / / * / / / Safety MF (= 81) On *1 / / / Before Use 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Color Red/Yellow/Blue *1 / / / / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 187 Flash Settings (= 52, = 89, = 90, = 95) Safety FE Auto 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Manual 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Flash Output *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Red-Eye Lamp On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide Off *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ISO Auto Settings (= 76) 1 * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Low/Standard/High *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Hg Lamp Corr. (= 49) 1 * / / / / / High ISO NR (= 76) Shutter Sync. *1 / / / / / / Rate of Change / / / *1 / / / Max ISO Speed Flash Exp. Comp 1 Before Use On Flash Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / On/Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index / / 1 / / / 188 Spot AE Point (= 74) 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec. Center *1 / / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AF Point *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Safety Shift (= 94) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Wind Filter (= 37) * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Review image after shooting (= 52) Off/Quick / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Hold * / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Display Info *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Detailed *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Blink Detection (= 51) / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off *1 / / / Display Time *1 / / / / On Auto/Off 1 / / Off On *1 / / / / / / 1 / / / * / / / Before Use / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Custom Display (= 99) Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 189 Night Display (= 92) Dynamic IS On/Off *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / FUNC. Menu Layout (= 100) *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Stills (= 69) Save On/Off IS Mode Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Star Emphasis (= 66, = 67) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Star Portrait Settings (= 66) Shoot Only / / / / / / Sharp/Off/Soft Continuous *1 / / / *1 / / / / Include Stills/No Stills IS Settings (= 91) *1 / / / / / Digest Type (= 36) On/Off *1 / / / *1 / / / 2 Reverse Disp. (= 28) *1 / / / Before Use 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Star Visibility / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Standard/Prominent / / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 190 button (= 99) Set Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (= 69) Effect 1 / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / 15 sec./30 sec./1 min. / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Frame Rate / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Save Settings (= 101) / / / / button (= 99) Set 1 Shot Interval / / / / / / Before Use / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. *2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode. *3 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point]. *4 [On] when subject movement is detected. - Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (= 44) may not be displayed in some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images. Shooting Time 60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / On/Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index Set Control Ring Func. (= 97) *1 / / / Camera Basics / Face ID Settings (= 44) *1 / / / 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 191 Set Up Tab My Menu Tab Before Use Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Mute = 151 My Menu settings = 102 Volume = 151 Sound Options = 152 Hints & Tips = 152 Date/Time = 152 Item Ref. Page Time Zone = 152 Image Search = 108 Lens Retraction = 153 List/Play Digest Movies = 106 Eco Mode = 153 Smart Shuffle = 113 Power Saving = 27, = 153 Slideshow = 112 LCD Brightness = 153 Erase = 116 Start-up Image = 154 Protect = 114 Format = 154 Rotate = 117 File Numbering = 155 Favorites = 118 Create Folder = 155 Photobook Set-up = 171 Units = 155 i-Contrast = 123 Electronic Level = 155 Red-Eye Correction = 123 Video System = 162 Cropping = 121 Touch Operation = 156 Resize = 120 Touch Response = 156 My Colors = 122 Wi-Fi Settings = 127 Face ID Info = 107 Mobile Device Connect Button = 128 Transition Effect = 103 Copyright Info = 156 Index Effect = 107 Certification Logo Display = 157 Scroll Display = 103 Language = 157 Group Images = 110 Reset All = 157 Auto Rotate = 118 Resume = 103 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Playback Tab 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 192 Item Ref. Page Set Touch Actions = 119 Print Tab Item Ref. Page Print – Select Images & Qty. = 170 Select Range = 170 Select All Images = 170 Clear All Selections = 171 Print Settings = 169 Handling Precautions Before Use ●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact. Basic Guide ●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or erase image data. Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen. 3 Other Shooting Modes ●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. ●● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. ●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use. ●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for some time, charge it about once a year and use up the remaining charge before storage. Index 193 Specifications Camera Specifications Camera Effective Pixels (Max.) Approx. 20.2 million pixels Lens Focal Length 4.2x zoom: 8.8 (W) – 36.8 (T) mm (35mm film equivalent: 24 (W) – 100 (T) mm) LCD Monitor 3.0-type color TFT LCD Effective Pixels: Approx. 1,040,000 dots File Format Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) compliant Data Type Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original)) Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264; Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)) Interface Hi-speed USB HDMI output Analog audio output (stereo) Analog video output (NTSC/PAL) Power Source Battery Pack NB-13L AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 Dimensions (Based on CIPA Guidelines) 103.0 x 60.4 x 40.4 mm (4.06 x 2.38 x 1.59 in.) Approx. 304 g (approx. 10.72 oz.; including the Weight (Based on battery pack and memory card) CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 279 g (approx. 9.84 oz.; camera body only) Wi-Fi Before Use Standards IEEE 802.11b/g/n* * 2.4 GHz band only Basic Guide Transmission Methods OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n) DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) Advanced Guide Communication Modes Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2 *1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup *2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS Supported Channels 1 – 11 (PC2201) or 1 – 13 (PC2155) Model numbers indicated in parentheses Security WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode Digital Zoom [Standard] 24 – 403.2 mm (Represents the combined focal length of optical and digital zoom.) 6 Playback Mode Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 38.4 ‒ 160.0 mm 48.0 ‒ 200.0 mm 7 Wi-Fi Functions Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 194 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time Number of Shots Approx. 210 Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 310 Movie Recording Time*1 Approx. 40 minutes Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting*2) Approx. 1 hour, 10 minutes Playback Time Approx. 4 hours *1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming. *2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops automatically) repeatedly. ●● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA). ●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above. ●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack. Number of Shots per Memory Card Before Use The number of shots at an aspect ratio (= 48) of 3:2 per memory card is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect ratio. Recording Pixels Compression Ratio Number of Shots per Memory Card (Approx. shots) Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 8472 4 P Mode 4234 17091 30040 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 7442 24562 99135 6 Playback Mode 35089 141622 7 Wi-Fi Functions 342 1385 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 32 GB 852 3441 1379 5568 (Medium 1) 12M/ 4320x2880 1320 5329 2098 (Medium 2) 4M/2304x1536 (Small) 0.3M/720x480 RAW Images 5472x3648 – Advanced Guide 1 8 GB (Large) 20M/ 5472x3648 Basic Guide ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. Index 195 Recording Time per Memory Card Shooting Range Recording Time per Memory Card Image Quality 8 GB 30 min. 03 sec. 32 GB 2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.*2 2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec. 8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec. 5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec. 21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec. *1 26 min. 22 sec. for iFrame movies (= 72). *2 1 hr. 46 min. 33 sec. for iFrame movies (= 72). ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. ●● Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately seconds when shooting in [ 1 hour when shooting in [ ]. ●● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended. Focusing Range – 2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec. 43 min. 29 sec.*1 * Other modes * Maximum Telephoto ( ) Maximum Wide Angle ( ) 5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity 5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode – 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 5 – 50 cm (2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.) 5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity Basic Guide – 5 – 50 cm (2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.) 1.5 – 20 m (4.9– 66 ft.) 1.5 – 20 m (4.9 – 66 ft.) * Not available in some shooting modes. Continuous Shooting Speed Continuous Shooting Mode Speed Approx. 6.5 shots/sec. Approx. 4.4 shots/sec. Approx. 4.4 shots/sec. Flash Range Maximum wide angle ( Maximum telephoto ( Shooting Mode Before Use ) ) 50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.) 40 cm – 4.0 m (1.3 – 13 ft.) ●● Using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specified in Canon testing standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors. Index 196 Shutter Speed Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE [ ] mode, automatically set range 1 – 1/2000 sec. Available values in [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode (sec.)*1*2 250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25, 20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000 *1 In [ *2 In [ Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V) Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L) Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (twoindicator system) Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available. ] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available. Aperture f/number f/1.8 – f/11 (W), f/2.8 – f/11 (T) Available values in [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode* f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0, f/9.0, f/10, f/11 * Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available. Battery Pack NB-13L Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Dimensions: 29.6 x 42.0 x 9.5 mm (1.17 x 1.65 x 0.37 in.) Weight: Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.) 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 197 Index Numbers 1-point (AF frame mode) 83 A AC adapter kit 159, 162 Accessories 159 AEB shooting 76 AE lock 74 AF frames 83 AF lock 87 Aspect ratio 48 AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 34 Av (shooting mode) 94 AV cable 162 B Background defocus (shooting mode) 62 Batteries → Date/time (date/time battery) Battery charger 2, 159 Battery pack Charging 19 Eco mode 153 Level 179 Power saving 27 Black and white images 80 Blink detection 51 C C (shooting mode) 98 Camera Reset all 157 Camera access point mode 132 CameraWindow (computer) 163 CameraWindow (smartphone) 128 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 138 Clock 33 Color (white balance) 78 Compression ratio (image quality) 91 Connecting via an access point 135 Continuous shooting 39, 43 Control ring 97, 98, 109 Creative filters (shooting mode) 58 Creative Shot 54 Cropping 121, 167 Custom white balance 79 D Date/time Changing 21 Date/time battery 21 Settings 20 World clock 152 DC coupler 162 Defaults → Reset all Digital tele-converter 83 Digital zoom 40 Display language 22 DPOF 169 Dynamic Range Correction 77 E Eco mode 153 Editing Cropping 121 i-Contrast 123 My Colors 122 Red-eye correction 123 Resizing images 120 Editing or erasing connection information 149 Electronic level 50 Erasing 116 Erasing all 116 Error messages 177 Exposure AE lock 74 Compensation 74 FE lock 89 F Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 84 Face ID 44 Face select 85 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 65 Favorites 118 FE lock 89 File numbering 155 Fireworks (shooting mode) 56 Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60 Flash Deactivating flash 88 Flash exposure compensation 89 On 88 Slow synchro 88 Focus bracketing 82 Focus check 112 Focusing AF frames 83 AF lock 87 AF-point zoom 51 MF peaking 82 Servo AF 85 Touch AF 86 Focusing range Macro 81 Manual focus 81 Quick 57 Underwater macro 57 Focus lock 83 FUNC. menu Basic operations 29 Table 183 FUNC. menu layout 100 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide G Geotagging images 147 GPS information display 105 Grid lines 99 H Handheld nightscene (shooting mode) 55 HDMI cable 161 High dynamic range (shooting mode) 58 Household power 162 Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 36 I i-Contrast 77, 123 iFrame movies (movie mode) 72 Image quality → Compression ratio (image quality) Images Display period 52 Erasing 116 Playback → Viewing Protecting 114 Image stabilization 91 Image Sync 145 Indicator 32, 52 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 198 ISO speed 75 J Jump display 109 L LCD monitor 28 M M (shooting mode) 94 Macro (focusing range) 81 Magnified display 112 Manual focus (focusing range) 81 Manual (movie mode) 96 Memory cards 2 Recording time 196 Menu Basic operations 30 Table 181 Mercury lamp correction 49 Metering method 74 Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60 Mobile device connection button 128 Monochrome (shooting mode) 63 Movies Editing 124 Image quality (resolution/frame rate) 49, 50 Recording time 196 Multi-area White Balance 49 My Colors 80, 122 N ND filter 78 Nostalgic (shooting mode) 59 P P (shooting mode) 73 Package contents 2 Photobook set-up 171 PictBridge 160, 166 Playback → Viewing Portrait (shooting mode) 55 Poster effect (shooting mode) 58 Power 159 → AC adapter kit → Battery charger → Battery pack Power saving 27 Printing 166 Program AE 73 Protecting 114 Q Quick (focusing range) 57 R RAW 90 Red-eye correction 123 Remote shooting 148 Reset all 157 Resizing images 120 Resolution (image size) 49 Ring function selector button 97, 99 Rotating 117 S Saving images to a computer 164 Screen Display language 22 Icons 179, 180 Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards → Memory cards Searching 108 Self-timer 41 2-second self-timer 42 Customizing the self-timer 42 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 65 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 64 Sending images 143 Sending images to another camera 143 Sending images to a smartphone 128 Sending images to Web services 138 Sepia tone images 80 Servo AF 85 Shadow Correct 78 Shooting Shooting date/time → Date/time Shooting information 99, 179 Slideshow 112 Smart Shuffle 113 Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 63 Smile (shooting mode) 63 Snow (shooting mode) 56 Soft focus (shooting mode) 62 Software Installation 133, 164 Saving images to a computer 164 Sounds 151 Standard (movie mode) 71 Star (shooting mode) 66 Star nightscape (shooting mode) 67 Star portrait (shooting mode) 66 Star time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 69 Star trails (shooting mode) 68 Stereo AV cable 160, 161, 162 Strap 2, 18 Super vivid (shooting mode) 58 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide T Terminal 161, 162, 166 Touch Actions 119 Touch AF 86 Touch Shutter 42 Toy camera effect (shooting mode) 61 Traveling with the camera 152 Troubleshooting 173 TV display 161 Tv (shooting mode) 93 U Underwater macro (focusing range) 57 Underwater (shooting mode) 56 V Viewing 24 Image search 108 Index display 107 Jump display 109 Magnified display 112 Single-image display 24 Slideshow 112 Smart Shuffle 113 TV display 161 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 199 W White balance (color) 78 Wi-Fi functions 127 Wi-Fi menu 130 Wind filter 37 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 64 World clock 152 Wrist strap → Strap Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Z Zoom 22, 34, 40, 41 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index 200 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ●● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use -- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where use is allowed. Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from use in other countries and regions. ●● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties: -- Altering or modifying the product -- Removing the certification labels from the product ●● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or services (including this product) outside Japan. ●● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo. ●● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use. The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content. ●● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary. ●● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or theft of the product. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product due to loss or theft of the product. ●● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide. Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in this guide. ●● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical equipment or other electronic equipment. Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Radio Wave Interference Precautions ●● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time as this product. Security Precautions Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required. Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi. ●● Only use networks you are authorized to use. This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks. If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur. 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index ●● Transmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending. 201 ●● Unauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems). To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly secure your Wi-Fi network. Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings. The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP enables PictBridge connections in network environments, and the camera is also compatible with this standard. Trademarks and Licensing Before Use ●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Basic Guide ●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Advanced Guide ●● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc. 1 Camera Basics ●● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC. 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc. 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix ●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. ●● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. ●● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. ●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. ●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard. Disclaimer ●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited. ●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards. Index ●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product specifications and appearance. ●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. ●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss arising from the use of this product. 202-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
Canon PowerShot G7 X Handleiding
- Categorie
- Bridge camera's
- Type
- Handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Canon PowerShot G7 X User manual
Gerelateerde artikelen
Andere documenten
-
Sony DSC-H90 Handleiding
-
Acer ASPIRE V5-571PG-53334G75MAK de handleiding
-
-
-
Minox DC 1222 Gebruikershandleiding
-
-
-
-
-
Samsung Digimax 130 Handleiding